Home

Manual - Equipco

1. Nom Reg R37ragR3 RES PE R72 PRINTER E7 usa 15 TRE u47 H 1 F ua 4 ni ceg v 9 pis v eg n T UE ments EN ey UT EN u o va Tt EL L
2. t 5 5 5 ve T 1 Ras 28 E 5 ve 5 bos c18 5 5 2 8 5 E 5 ve our p gle L Fo 4 1 2 E gssl ozge 1 gly 278 33 85 5 43 ss vo gt 7660 EE d 10K Hota gigs 5 2N3702 28 bo Aic is c 5 UN us uf T INHIBIT 1K Vt lt SAN wt K 35285 5 8 FLOW PULSE e 2 8735 AS R13 RH 1 2 EVENT MARK GND GND e Ab mm gle GND GND GND GND 8 x 8 5 2 2 2 E zl 2 zie Eye Eye 51 BOTTLE GND 5 BE
3. VIOLET c2 z 1N4744A 1N4744A z2 MOTOR 07 PI ak P2 GREY DISTRIBUTOR MOTOR FILTER 131 FERRITE FOR POB 603703249 Pi POWERIN Ue Ete 8 2 M RAZ 8 2 a b 3 POWER 9r P7 o2 BLK OFNT pa bss OpN2 o5 TOCPU us o7 P3 0 FLOWMETER FLOWMETER PRINTER B OT GRAY or 02 BLU PRINTER Key D o4 TO CPU Oc o5 P9 06 veL 07 kev PRINTER P Lo 12 m 281 To PUMP ol Lo com do 56 FERRITE ED TO P201 TOCPU PUMP 205 Oi PUMP FWD REV 201 PUMP ON OFF 212 04 voLLED KEY 209 5 210 anD ate R203 R202 5 1K 5 1K 4 Q202 3 TOCPU 21 m NA DISTRIBUTOR 9T DIST MTR 1 2 02 DIST MTR R204 10201 I em o5 BTL sw aw KEY R201 o7 Snow wi am GND ENS 10 A a mr M 6 7 208 ro E 4 o o com o 4 Lo ue P201 NO 121 K2oi SHUT OFF MICROSWITCH 206 1 2 PUMP MOTOR o 1 4 2 3 OPTICAL SWITCH 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Samp
4. 60 2544 028 Connect cable for external 12 VDC power source terminates in heavy duty battery clips enel RR eR a ON Re oa 60 1394 023 Interfacing Equipment Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 5 60 1644 000 Extra Instruction Manual Model 1640 see e 60 1644 009 Connect cable 25 Isco sampler to Isco flow 60 3004 107 Connector only without cable for use with non Isco flow meters with an isolated contact closure proportional to flow 68 1680 060 Same as above with 22 cable terminating in two 60 1394 077 Type A Interface converts pulse duration flow meter output proportional to flow into pulses acceptable to Isco samplers 60 1784 007 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface converts analog signal flow meter output as specified by user into pulses acceptable to Isco 1 60 3704 037 Isco Field Printer is eR NC E aE eg wp ee 60 3774 001 FLOWLINK 3 Software with manual dacit Fue ders 68 2544 043 SAMPLINK Sampler Interrogation Software with manual 60 3774 013 Interrogator communications line kit 9 pin connects laptop computer with a 9 pin serial port to
5. 60 2544 044 Interrogator communications line kit 25 pin connects laptop computer with 25 pin serial port to 1 60 2544 040 Master Slave Interconnect Cable 10 60 3704 065 3700 Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable Connects two 3700 Samplers as a master and slave to a flow 60 3704 080 149 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix C Display Index M Note To access the display number press the stop key while the sampler displays the screen in question The display numbers are available in the Standby and Program states Figure 44 Time Line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Event No 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 45 45 45 Interval 6 intervals of 20 minutes 9 intervals of 30 minutes 3 intervals of 45 minutes Start Time Table 13 Display Index This display appears after you press the ENTER PROGRAM key while in standby Select PROGRAM to access the program sequence Select CONFIGURE to access the configure sequence PROGRAM CONFIGURE Display 1 SAMPLER This informational display appears when you stop the pump with the STOP key after pressing the PUMP FOR WARD key It reports the number of pump counts detected while the pump was in operation Exit this display by pr
6. 68 6700 111 Model 3700 Sampler controller with pump 68 3700 004 Extra 24 bottle base with 24 polypropylene bottles 1000 ml with caps 60 3704 033 Extra 24 bottle base with 24 glass bottles 350 ml with caps 60 3704 031 Extra 12 bottle base with 12 one quart bottles with caps amp 68 3700 019 Extra 12 bottle base with 12 one liter round polypropylene bottles with caps 68 3700 029 12 bottle conversion kit polypropylene 68 3700 028 12 bottle conversion kit glass llle 68 3700 018 Plastic graduated cylinder 1000 ml for sample volume 299 0020 00 4 bottle Conversion Kit E RE deuce WAP ele ese eas 60 3704 096 Bottles Caps and Retaining Rings Extra retaining ring for 24 polypropylene bottles 1000 1 60 3703 058 Extra retaining ring for 24 glass bottles 350 ml 60 2703 011 Extra retaining ring for 12 one quart glass bottles 60 2703 011 Sample bottles 1000 ml polypropylene without caps case of 100 68 2100 008 Caps for 1000 ml polypropylene bottles with polyethylene foam liners case of 100 68 2100 010
7. 70 10 Recommended configuration settings for storm 74 11 Flow Meter Connector Wiring 112 12 Printer Connector Wiring 112 13 Display 150 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler List of Examples 1 Checking the configure option settings 33 2 Time paced sequential sampling 36 3 Flow paced sequential sampling 38 4 Time paced multiplexed samples per bottle eliam ere 40 5 Flow paced multiplexed samples per bottle sampling even 48 6 Time paced composite sampling 45 T Calibration RI Uu Re RUE 49 8 Load Stored 55 9 Save Current 56 10 Time paced sampling Uniform time intervals 82 11 Time paced multiplexed samples per bottle sampling nce eschewed ee sees 84 12 Extended flow paced multiplexed bottles per sample 86 13 Flow paced sampling with bottle sets based on ime ignei vel ta yaa 88 14 Time paced samples at nonuniform time intervals A 91 15 Time paced samples at nonuniform clock times 94 16 Sampling with stops and resumes 95 17 Storm Sampling 98 18 Prog
8. 24 Operating States 24 Programming Modes 24 Configure Sequence 27 Introduction to the Programming Procedure 27 Using the Keypad to Respond to Displays 27 Keypad Description 28 Displays gt RE eet Re doe 29 Configure Sequence 50 Set eat RATS ER EE RA 50 Bottles and Sizes 50 Suction Line ekle em neath 51 Liquid 51 Programming Mode 52 Load Stored 55 Save Current 56 Flow Mode Sampling 57 Nonuniform 57 Calibrate 57 Sampling 57 Start Time 1 58 Enable Pin ises coiis eR EE ead ES 58 Event Mark eco Ne e rei UR qe e 59 ee 59 Tubing Life o RAIL Ee 59 Program Lock 22 61 Sampler ID 61 Run Diagnostics 61 Exit Configuration 61 Extended Programming Mode 64 Extended Mode Sample Pacing 65 Exte
9. Example 22 Run State Displays Time paced sampling event time followed by the current time Indicates the bottle number of the next sequential sample The second line reports the scheduled sample Display 1 BOTTLE 5 AT 5 44 5 42 33 gram requires four bottles per sample event Indicates the scheduled time and receiving bottle numbers for an upcoming sample event The sampling pro Display 2 BOTTLES 1 4 AT 6 00 5 55 33 Indicates the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number The program requires four samples per bottle Display 3 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 AT 6 00 5 55 33 Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The bottle set consists of four bottles The sampling program requires that four samples be placed in each bottle of the set Display 4 1 OF 4 BTLS 1 4 AT 6 00 5 55 33 Indicates the sample and bottle number of the next sample event The current time appears in the lower right corner The sampling program requires that you use one bottle per sample event and that you switch the bot tles on a time basis This display alternates with the display illustrated in item 6 at 3 second intervals Display 5 SAMPLE 3 BOTTLE 1 AT 6 00 5 42 33 107 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Indicates the time of the next bottle switch NEXT
10. ID Teflon lined Suction Lift 26 ft 7 9 m maximum Pumping Rate at 3 feet of head 4 ID suction tubing 3000 ml min 1 ID suction tubing 3500 ml min Line Transport Velocity at 3 feet of head 14 ID suction tubing 5 1 ft sec 38 inch ID suction tubing 2 5 ft sec Clock Specifications Real Time Clock Accuracy 1 min month typical Sample Specifications Sample Volume Accuracy With the liquid detector enabled and automatic compensation for head typically the greater of 10 or 20 ml over a head range of 1 to 12 ft and sampler supply voltage of 10 to 18 volts Sample Volume Repeatability 10 ml typical Sample Frequency Selectable from 1 min to 99 hrs 59 min in 1 min increments between consecutive samples or from 1 to 9 999 flow pulses in sin gle pulse intervals Users can enter nonuniform times in minute intervals or clock time Flow Meter Signal Specifications Flow Meter Signal Requirements 5 to 15 volt DC pulse or isolated contact closure of at least 25 ms duration 4 20 mA or pulse duration signal may be converted with optional interface unit 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 2 Setup Procedures Chapter Contents Setup procedures Assembly and disassembly of the case Preparation of base section Cooling of the samples Attachment of the suction line Placeme
11. 0122 9 per a g 2 x x D2 gt a D2 PCO 16 gt gt C4 4 o L3 2 a 2 8 40106 m 03 gt gt 5 S gt gt COL3 KEYBOARD 1 R37 R39 5 T gt 04 gt 5 262 72 gt gt c2 do wc 7 D5 gt gt 05 Pos gt gt GND GND 100K GND 8 5 De gt Pos 27 12 GND 07 gt 07 Pos DIST Pos GND T BTL FULL GND Po7 5 82C55A T 1 45 Se ase 5 3 3 3 us 4 2 ve 6 4081 28 PRINTR x 40106 S 1 SENSE BACKLIGHT 45 2 RECEIVE une 10K 3 KEY E 4 3 A 5 8 9 a 8 12 see id s det 2 Qt I T 6 TRANSMIT va Yn os a PAP S 10K m D40C2 40106 4081 Ena LAS GND 8 No x 8 2 P 1 13 2 83 n 3 T VY ra 2 u 1 ue ZlesHz g gno jo Jo ja ap PIRR 8 8 see P5 2 Hn 10 gt gt R6 2N3702 GNo GND 9 Req 47 t 8 gt gt RS 7 R64 6 gt gt 84 5 R64 mE gt gt 4 gt gt RB gt gt IRD PUMP 3 47K R64 3 1 PUMP FWD REV 2 4 gt gt V 2 Key i ma b PUMP ONOFF KEYPAD gt gt R2 4 x2E 4 VOLLED OR FRA PR A 2o Te be n e St aN ae z 8 8 8 8 8 Wr sm vob 4 Vp Vo az 2 7 sy p 5 PUMP COUNTS no NC IRD gt RD vob 2 8 NC 7673 Sb a VOLONT 51 70 16 5 bga 4 14 13 200 pid Ssl m rm m MR gt WR vo 2 832 GND Pb
12. Bottles and Sizes configure option This display appears when you select PORTABLE in Display 220 Select the number of bottles in the bottle base 1 4 12 24 Display 221 BOTTLES Bottles and Sizes configure option This display appears when you select REFRIG in Display 220 Select the number of bottles in the base 1 2 4 8 12 24 Display 222 BOTTLES Bottles and Sizes configure option Enter the bottle volume in milliliters BOTTLE VOLUME IS Display 223 Bottles and Sizes configure option This display appears when you have entered a bottle volume in Display 223 that exceeds a standard Isco bottle size ARE YOU Display 224 SURE YES NO Suction Line configure option Select 1 4 if you are using 4 inch suction line 5 8 if you are using inch suction line SUCTION LINE ID IS Display 230 1 4 3 8 INCH Suction Line configure option This display appears when you have selected in Display 230 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line TEFLON if you are using Teflon suction line SUCTION LINE IS Display 231 VINYL TEFLON Suction Line configure option Enter the length of the suction line Do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the length measurement SUCTION LINE LENGTH Displey 23 IS FEET 3 99 Liquid Detector configu
13. Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Step 15 Select TIME Step 16 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER TIME FLOW PACED SAMPLING Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry Step 17 SAMPLE EVERY 0 HOURS 1 MINUTES Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 Step 18 SAMPLE EVERY 0 HOURS 15 MINUTES Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 Step 19 48 COMPOSITE SAMPLES 0 200 Enter the sample volume 250 Note that the upper limit of the range of acceptable volumes has been adjusted When you want to collect 48 samples the maximum sample volume is 310 ml If you need to use a larger sample volume you must adjust the sample number downward Step 20 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 250 ml EACH 10 310 Select YES to enter the start time for the routine Step 21 ENTER START TIME YES NO Enter the start time and date 6 00 on June 20 Step 22 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT 6 00 20 06 JUN After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to Step 23 run the program PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE After this messages displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state Step 24 STANDBY 10 40 23 19 JUN 91 47 3700 Standar
14. BOTTLES PER SAMPLE SAMPLES PER BOTTLE Step 6 Enter the number of bottles per sample event 2 2 BOTTLES PER Step 7 SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml Hes SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 500 10 1000 Select YES 5 ENTER START TIME YES NO Enter the start time for the sampling routine Note that the sampler may receive flow pulses before the sam pling routine begins Any pulses received before the start time will be disregarded START FLOW COUNT AT Step 10 5 00 20 06 JUN 43 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler After this message displays briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 11 COMPLETE Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 12 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number START SAMPLING Step 13 AT BOTTLE 1 1 23 This display appears after you press the START SAMPLING key to start the routine It reports the scheduled start time on the first line The second line reports the current time and date START FLOW COUNT Step 14 AT5 00 10 37 23 When the scheduled start ti
15. NOW ON BOTTLE 2 Start Sampling Once you have programmed and configured the sampler use the START SAMPLING key to run the sampling program The first display you ll see after pressing the START SAMPLING key is illustrated in display h If you want to have the sampling program begin with a bottle other than Bottle 1 enter the first bottle number here If 1 is acceptable press the ENTER PROGRAM key to place the sampler into the run state If you do not press a key within 60 seconds the sam pler will automatically enter the run state and will begin the sampling routine with Bottle 1 START SAMPLING AT BOTTLE 1 1 24 There are three instances where the sampler will not be able to run the program immediately These occur when the program has been started after 1 the programmed start time 2 the first switch time and 3 one or more programmed stop times The sampler responds to these situations as dis cussed in Examples 18 19 and 20 Resume Sampling To resume or restart the pro gram press the RESUME SAMPLING or START SAM PLING key When you press RESUME SAMPLING the program will resume at the point it was halted The display must read PROGRAM HALTED for the resume sampling key to be active If any sam ples were missed during the time the program was halted the sampler will inform you with the mes sage illustrated in i The sampler will initiate one sample event if it missed on
16. 5 Interfacing Equipment 5 Chapter 2 Setup Procedures 10 Chapter 10 3700 Sampler Setup 10 Assembly and Disassembly of the Case 10 Preparation of the 3700 Standard Base Section 10 Preparation of the 3700 Compact Base Section 10 Bottles e VES ees 10 Cooling the 10 Attaching the Suction Line 11 Strainers v rette teed iw a 11 Connection to Power Source 12 Placement of the Sampler 12 Connection to a Flow Meter or Flow Logger 13 Placing the Sampler into Operation 13 Sampler 14 Chapter 3 Safety Procedures 15 Important Information 15 General Safety Procedures 15 Lethal Atmospheres in Sewers 16 Chapter 4 Programming Guidelines 20 Introduction 20 Description of Sampling Operations 20 Sample Events and the Sampling Cycle 20 Types 21 Types of Sampling Available Through the Extended Programming 22 STORM 28 Programming Introduction
17. YES NO 84 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 12 COMPLETE After the sampler is properly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 13 5 39 25 20 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here START SAMPLING AT BOTTLE 1 1 24 This display is used with samples per bottle multiplexing The first line indicate the number of the upcoming sample and the total number of samples each bottle is to receive It also indicates the current bottle number Thus this display indicates that the upcoming sample is the first of four samples and bottle one is to receive the next sample The second line indicates the scheduled time of the sample The current time is shown in the right corner as the sampler counts down to the next sample event time 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 15 AT 5 41 5 39 33 When the scheduled sample event time arrives the second line will disappear while the sampler completes the pre sample purge Step 16 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 When the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample the second line will indicat
18. BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 500 ml This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicates the bottle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the scheduled time for the next event on the left the current time is displayed on the right BOTTLE 2 Step 21 11 36 11 26 11 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 22 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 24 SAMPLES Step 23 8 10 35 21 JUN 91 93 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Nonuniform times can be entered in either the method shown in Example 14 or by specifying a clock time and date for each sample The abbreviated example below shows the displays used to enter the clock times The type of display clock time or minutes used in the program sequence is controlled by the settings in the Nonuniform Times configure option you must specify either clock time or minutes in that configure option Example 15 Time paced samples at nonuniform clock times Enter the time and date for the first sample event Times and dates are entered on the second line of the dis play TAKE SAMPLES AT Step 1 1 06 00 19 JUN Enter the time and d
19. Step 11 1 4 3 8 INCH This display appears when you have selected 3g in step 11 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line TEFLON if you are using Teflon suction line Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection SUCTION LINE IS Step 12 VINYL TEFLON Enter the length of the suction line Do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the length Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry and move to step 14 If you change the suction line settings the CALCULATING PUMP TABLE VALUES message will appear for a short time SUCTION LINE LENGTH Step 13 IS 10 FEET 3 99 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key at this display to access the Liquid Detector input displays shown in steps 15 to 18 SELECT OPTION gt Step 14 LIQUID DETECTOR Select ENABLE to turn on the Liquid Detector on DISABLE to turn off the Liquid Detector For the pur poses of the following examples select ENABLE Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection You should normally leave the detector enabled unless you suspect it is malfunctioning If you disable the detector you will need to enter the suction head in the program sequence ENABLE DISABLE Step 15 LIQUID DETECTOR 34 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 15 For the purposes of this example
20. This entry should always include the sample taken at the start time Step 6 Enter the number of samples to occur at the first interval The sampler is to take samples at 10 minute inter vals for an hour or 6 samples in the first hour Since the first sample is taken at the start time the remaining TAKE 24 SAMPLES 1 999 five samples will occur at the 10 minute interval Step 7 When you have completed the first entries the display will roll to move the first interval entries to the first line and add the second line entries for the next series of samples and intervals Enter the next entries 3 samples at 20 minutes Step 8 Enter the third set of samples and int Step 9 Enter 1 to set the number of bottles Step 10 Select SAMPLES Step 11 Enter 1 to set the number of sample QUANTITY AT INTERVAL 1 5 AT 10 MINUTES 1 5 AT 10 MINUTES 2 3 AT 20 MINUTES ervals 15 samples at 30 minutes 2 3 AT 20 MINUTES 3 15 AT 30 MINUTES per sample event to 1 1 BOTTLES PER SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 CHANGE BOTTLES BASED ON SAMPLES s per bottle to 1 CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY 1SAMPLES 1 50 at 500 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 500ml 10 1000 Step 12 Enter 500 to set the sample volume Step 13 Select NO Step 14 ENTER START TIME YES NO After this message
21. Description of Sampling Operations contains a description of the sampling cycle as well as the operations The Types of Samples section discusses sample types that can be taken in both basic and extended mode with the 3700 Sampler The Programming Introduction section dis cusses the samplers program structure and introduces both basic and extended program ming modes The Operating States section discusses the sampler s three operating states Introduction to the Programming Procedures describes the basic programming mode The sections Using the Keypad to Respond to Displays Keypad Description and Displays discuss programming the sampler with the keypad Basic Programming provides examples for the basic programming mode The Configure Sequence section discusses how to tailor the sampler to your specific application The Extended Programming Mode section dis cusses the mode and presents programming examples Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Mea sure discusses adjusting the sampler for a for eign language and or metric units The Standby State section discusses your options when the sampler is in standby The Run State section discusses what is occur ring when your 3700 is operating in the run state 20 Description of Sampling Operations This information introduces the types of sampling performed by the 3700 and the terminology that describes those capabilities Sample Events and the
22. ENTER START TIME Step 19 LYES NO Display 90 This display requires two entries Enter a time of 06 00 and a date of 20 06 to start the storm routine at 6 00 AM on June 20 STORM ENABLED AFTER Step 20 06 00 20 09 Display 93 After displaying this message the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 21 COMPLETE This display appears when you press START SAMPLING START STORM PROGRAM 6 00 5 33 07 99 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The displays shown in step 22 alternate as the sampler s clock approaches the start time The first line reports the bottles which will receive the first sample volumes for each bottle group The second line reports the start Step 22 Step 23 Step 24 time at the left and the current time on the right BOTTLE 1 6 25 5 38 07 1 of 2 BOTTLE 3 AFTER 5 PULSES As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the mes message remains through the post sample purge BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 900 ml The sampler will continue to alternate displays until the routine terminates BOTTLE 2 6 30 6 26 1 1 of 2 BOTTLE 3 AFTER 5 PULSES sage on the second line appears This The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 25 i When the routine is completed th
23. Use Display 16 to determine when the sampler will begin filling the second bottle group Select 79 DURING if you want the second bottle group filled during the same time period as the first bot tle group Select AFTER to begin the flow pacing for the second bottle group after the sampler fills the first bottle group If you select DURING the sampler will begin counting flow pulses when it begins tim ing the delay to first group sample The sampler will take the first sample of the second bottle group as soon at it counts a full flow pulse interval If you select AFTER the sampler will begin counting flow pulses after the last sample event of the first bottle group Use Display 22 to enter the flow pulse interval for the second bottle group The third flow paced display allows you to enter the maximum flow interval The acceptable range of values for the maximum flow interval is one minute to 99 hours and 59 minutes The sampler will terminate the sampling routine when the amount of time between flow paced sam ples exceeds the limit set for the maximum flow interval The maximum flow interval will termi nate the routine even if all bottles of either bottle group have not been filled Once the sampler ter minates a routine the sampler cannot be reen abled by the flow meter should the flow meter detect enable control conditions again Note If the second bottle group requires flow paced samples th
24. AFTER 9 PULSES i BOTTLES 1 2 AFTER 1 PULSES When the tenth pulse is received the display will show the current bottle number only Step 18 BOTTLE 1 87 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When the pump begins to run forward to deliver the sample volume the second line appears After the pump completes the sample delivery it reverses to purge the liquid from the pump tube past the liquid detector The suction line is not completely purged instead the liquid is pumped just past the liquid detector At the end of the pump tube purge the distributor moves to the next bottle of the set The display remains unchanged until the distributor relocates to the next bottle of the set BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 800 ml As the distributor moves to the next bottle the bottle number reported in the display changes to indicate the bottle number The message PUMPING 800 ml will remain on the display When the distributor reaches the correct position over the current bottle the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume When the delivery is completed the pump reverses to complete the post sample purge BOTTLE 2 Step 19 PUMPING 800 At the end of the post sample purge the display changes to indicate the bottle numbers of the next bottle set The display will change as it receives each flow pulse BOTTLES 3 4 Step 20 AFTER 10 PULSES The cycle is repeated until the samplin
25. Acts on respira amounts unless an oxygen tory nerves deficiency exists Carbon Chemical asphyxiant 0 97 Combines with hemo 400 50 12 5 74 0 Near top especially Manufactured gas CO ampoules Monoxide Colorless tasteless globin of blood Uncon if present with products of combus CO Flammable Poisonous scious in 30 minutes at illuminating gas tion motor exhausts 0 2 to 0 25 Fatal in Fires of almost any 4 hours at 0 1 Head kind ache in a few hours at 0 2 Carbon Heavy ethereal odor 5 3 Intestinal upset loss of 1 000 100 At bottom Industrial wastes Detectable odor at low Tetrachlo consciousness possi to solvent cleaning concentrations ride ble renal damage res 1 500 CCl4 piratory failure Chlorine Irritant Yellow green 2 49 Irritates respiratory 4 1 CAR At bottom Chlorine cylinder and Detectable odor at low color Choking odor tract Kills most ani feed line leeks concentrations detectable in very low con mals in a very short centrations Nonflamma time at 0 1 ble Formal Colorless pungent suffo 1 07 Irritating to the nose 10 7 0 73 0 Near bottom Incomplete combus Detectable odor dehyde cating odor tion of organics Com 20 air pollutant fungicide Gasoline Volatile solvent Color 3 0 Anesthetic effects 4 000 1 000 1 3 6 0 At bottom Service stations 1 Combustible gas 12 less Odor noticeable at to when inhaled Rapidly garages storage indicator to
26. Example 17 The sampler will prompt you to enter a start time with Display 93 step 20 If you select NO the start time will be delayed by the amount set in the Start Time Delay configure option After you ve made these entries the sampler will present the PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COM PLETE message and return to standby Programmed start times start time delays and delays to group sample Samplers pro grammed for storm sampling respond to start time delays and programmed start times in the same way as samplers programmed for any other basic or extended mode routines The sampler will delay the storm routine until the start time entered in the third segment of the STORM sequence See Display 93 If the sam pler is enabled by the flow meter at the start time the sampler will begin to time the delay to the first bottle group If the sampler is disabled by the flow meter at the start time the sampler will suspend the routine until it becomes enabled Once the sampler is enabled by the flow meter the sampler will begin the delay to first timed sample event and continue the STORM routine STORM sampling routine has four delay periods that vary slightly with the programming entries Every STORM routine will have a delay to start time and delay to first group sample Depending on whether the second bottle group is time paced or flow paced the third delay period will be either the delay to second group sample or th
27. Teflon suction line with protective coating without strainer 60 1683 146 38 ID x 25 Teflon suction line with protective coating without strainer 60 2703 114 Uc ID vinyl tubing bulle 100 aon edge ek wes PACS AG Ls AUPE AS 60 1680 055 1 ID vinyl tubing bulle 500 s OS t ei tn t 60 1680 056 14 ID vinyl tubing bulk 1000 0 0 0 cece cee e 60 1680 057 ID vinyl tubing bulk 100 2 0455 22525 na tt umb a asado 60 1680 058 3 3 ID vinyl tubing bulle DOO eode aired euer EXER Wares en otn ea E b o RES 60 1680 059 Vinyl suction line accessory kit required for 1 4 suction lines 68 3700 006 3 8 Vinyl suction line accessory e 68 3700 007 Weighted strainer only polypropylene body 60 1394 070 Low flow strainer only all stainless 8 1 60 2903 081 Weighted strainer only all stainless 1 60 1684 110 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Weighted strainer only 3 8 polypropylene body 60 1394 071 Low flow strainer only all stainless steel not recommended for use with Teflon suction 60 2903 079 Weighted strainer only 38 all plastic 60 3704 066 Extra Sil
28. You can distribute samples in either group sequentially or in any of the three types of multi plexing Three bottle configurations are available for STORM sampling with the 3700 Standard are the 24 bottle configuration with either 1 000 or 350 ml bottles a 12 bottle configuration containing 1 quart 950 ml glass bottles and a 4 bottle configu ration with 1 gallon 3 800 ml glass bottles With the 3700 Compact 24 bottle sets have a capacity of 500 ml and 12 bottle sets have a 300 ml capacity STORM sampling takes full advantage of the sam pler enable programming available through the Isco 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters or the 4100 Series Flow Logger and the FLOWLINK software You can program the flow meter to moni tor the flow stream for storm conditions a spe cific amount of rainfall for example and enable the sampler when it detects those conditions Master Slave Sampling A notable feature is the master slave setting which allows you to operate two 3700 Samplers as a master slave pair Master slave sampler pairing doubles the capacity of a sampling installation and to perform continuous sampling Two samplers can be connected so that one sam pler the master inhibits the operation of the sec ond sampler the slave until the master completes its sampling routine The samplers then reverse roles You can service a full sampler while its coun terpart is running a routine In some applications master slave p
29. running forward Display 332 Purge Counts The Purge Counts option is used to override the number of pump counts needed to clear the suction line in both pre sample purge and post sample purge cycles The pre sample purge count is normally set to 150 counts and will be reset to this value if the sampler is reinitialized The post sample purge count is derived from the suction line diameter and length settings If your observations indicate that a greater or lesser number of pump counts in either purge is needed you can change the count settings Entries are to be between 0 and 9 999 for both purges You can obtain a purge count using the pump forward or pump reverse keys Display s 340 and 341 Tubing Life The Tubing Life option sets the number of pump counts needed to trigger the Replace Pump Tub ing warning The warning is activated when the pump count reaches the entered value You must reset the pump counter after replacing the pump tubing If you consistently experience a tubing fail ure at a pump count that differs significantly from the current setting enter that value here The fac tory set value of 500 000 pump counts will deliver approximately 500 samples of 200 ml each using a 38 inch by 10 foot vinyl suction line at a 5 foot suc tion head Display 350 351 and 352 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 16 Event Mark and Bottle Number Signal Output Pre sample Purge Rinse Cycle Pump Volume
30. the distributor moves to the sec ond bottle SAMPLE 1 BOTTLE 2 Step 20 PUMPING 100 ml After the bottles of the set have each received a sample volume the alternating pair of displays reappear SAMPLE 2 BTLS 1 2 Step 21 AFTER 1000 PULSES NEXT SET CHANGE Step 22 12 00 19 When the next sample event occurs this display reports the current sample event and the current bottle When the sample delivery is completed the distributor will move to the next bottle of the set and the following display will appear Step 23 SAMPLE 2 BOTTLE 1 SAMPLE 2 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 100 ml This cycle will be repeated as samples are deposited in the bottles of the set The sample number will increase with each sample deposited until the set change SAMPLE 2 BOTTLE 2 Step 24 PUMPING 100 ml 90 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When the bottle sets are changed the sample event number is reset to one The bottle numbers of the new cur rent set is reported SAMPLE 1 BTLS 3 4 Step 25 AFTER 1000 PULSES SAMPLE 1 BTLS 3 4 AFTER 1000 PULSES The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 26 i When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE
31. 0 3 Flammable 4 0 fatal at 2 4 Danger 7 000 tanks houses 2 Oxygen deficiency ous for short exposure indicator at 1 1 to 2 2 Hydrogen Simple asphyxiant Color 0 07 Acts mechanically to 4 0 74 0 At top Manufactured gas Combustible gas indi H5 less odorless tasteless deprive tissues sludge digestion tank cator Flammable of oxygen Does not gas electrolysis of support life water Rarely from rock strata Hydrogen Faint odor of bitter 0 93 Slight symptoms 10 6 0 40 0 Near top Insecticide and Detector tube Cyanide almonds appear upon exposure rodenticide HCN Colorless gas to 0 002 to 0 004 0 3 rapidly fatal Hydrogen Irritant and poisonous vol 1 19 Impairs sense of smell 200 20 4 3 45 0 Near bottom but may Coal gas petroleum 1 H2S Ampoule Sulfide atile compound Rotten rapidly as to be above bottom if air sewer gas Fumes 2 5 by weight lead H2S egg odor in small concen concentration 300 is heated and highly from blasting under acetate solution trations Exposure for 2 to increases Death in a humid some conditions 15 minutes at 0 01 few minutes at 0 2 Sludge gas impairs sense of smell Exposure 0 07 to Odor not evident at high 0 1 rapidly causes concentrations Color acute poisoning Para less Flammable lyzes respiratory cen ter Methane Simple asphyxiant Color 0 55 Acts mechanically to Probably no 5 0 15 0 At top increasing to Natural gas sludge 1 Combustible gas CH4 less odorl
32. 1 Pump Volume 2 Pump Volume Post sample Purge LM Event Mark Bottle Number Event Mark Bottle Number Event Mark Bottle Number a Event Mark Bottle Number D Continuous During Forward Pumping Only 60 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Program Lock Select ENABLE to turn the lock on When the Program Lock is enabled each protected display can be viewed but no values can be changed with out first entering the pass number 3700 Once the pass number has been entered you can change any value or setting in either the program or con figure sequence Display 360 Sampler ID The Sampler ID option allows you to enter a 10 character identification number ID for the sam pler The ID number is used to identify sampling reports produced by the Isco Field Printer and in files created by SAMPLINK The sampler is shipped from the factory with 10 dashes entered for the ID Display 365 Acceptable Characters The ID field will accept digits dashes spaces and periods You can enter spaces dashes and periods with three of the con trol keys Enter a space with the START SAMPLING key a dash with the MANUAL SAMPLE key and a period with the RESUME SAMPLING key Run Diagnostics Run Diagnostics performs a number of diagnostic functions This option contains the software revi sion number tests the sampler s RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Memory dis play
33. 1000 Display 1 Display 12 After displaying this message briefly the sampler will automatically advance to the next display of values 0 to 999 Display 15 Display 23 Display 24 Display 30 Display 31 Display 50 98 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The sampler will display this message before automatically advancing to the next display eer 18 BOTTLES 18000 ml AVAILABLE Select FLOW Step 12 TIME FLOW Display 14 SECOND BOTTLE GROUP Select DURING to fill the second bottle group at the same time as the first bottle group DURING AFTER Step 13 TIME MODE Display 16 Enter 5 as the flow pulse interval The sampler will take a sample every fifth flow pulse SAMPLE EVERY SERAN 5 PULSES 1 9999 Display 22 This display requires two entries Enter 2 hours and 0 to set the maximum amount of time between flow paced sample events MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF 2HOURS 0 MINUTES Display 110 Enter the number of bottles filled at each sample event 1 1 BOTTLES PER 1 22 Enter 2 to set the number of samples delivered to each bottle 2 SAMPLES PER Step 17 BOTTLE 1 50 Display 31 Enter the sample volume of 400 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF PIED T 400 ml 10 990 Select YES to enter start time in the following step
34. 6 at 20 minute intervals the next 9 at 30 minute intervals and the remain ing 3 at 45 minute intervals first enter a quantity of 6 at 20 minutes 9 at 30 minutes and 3 at 45 minutes Figure 44 shows a time line for the sampling routine QUANTITY AT INTERVAL Display 27 1 AT MINUTES This display appears for samplers configured for 2 8 and 24 bottles Display s 221 or 222 with the 3700 Por table or 24 for the 3700 Compact Display 22X It does not appear for samplers configured for a single bottle In the basic programming mode it follows Display 36 In the extended programming mode it follows one of the four sample interval entry displays Display s 21 22 26 27 Enter the number of bottles to receive a sample volume at each sample event BOTTLES PER Display 30 SAMPLE EVENT 1 MAX In the basic programming mode this display appears when you have selected SAMPLES PER BOTTLE in Display 36 In the extended programming mode it appears when the sampler is configured for 2 8 or 24 bot tles and there is only one bottle set Enter the number of samples you want deposited in each bottle SAMPLES PER Display 81 BOTTLE 1 MAX Select YES if you want the routine to perform bottles per sample or samples per bottle multiplexing Select NO if you want the routine to perform sequential sampling MULTIPLEX SAMPLES Display 35 NO Th
35. 7 4 2 s 10 1 bs Rl RXscri 55 gt gt D5 AD A lt lt Ag gt gt A6 AT a is DISPLAY GND 43 27 18 n 3 26 Y GND 5 Ds gt gt 06 gt US D4 lt lt D4 AD 00 lt bo 19 gt gt gt gt 46 Ves Ves Ves Vss 44 26 19 25 12 ME 7 10 2 4081 Sn pz M 55 v gt o 55 lt lt 05 gt bi gt 22 as 23 20 24 1 9 4081 xmas o6 gt Ato lt lt 06 gt o D2 Da 25 21 21 15 An An 07 xor gt Ato lt 0 4 23 16 2 gt 2 2 A12 An an D4 lt D4 5 vi 28 2 2 17 7 z An lt lt RD A2 55 D5 4 29 22 38 14 Le gt A14 lt lt ROMCS A be AB gt A Ute 3 14 19 13 I 15 gt gt 15 Vss PL lt lt 7 A9 B a gt gt vo1es 12 1 062 10 2 16 5 us M 5 a gt gt A16 Vss cu Noe gt gt 2 Q2 gt gt vores t a Ee Ts gt gt m NIS NIS 27C101 GND GND GND GND Ho139 duo d d d NOTE DENOTES 1 RESISTORS FOR 603703245 129 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler t Board Component Layout ircui Figure 42 Main C
36. 96 SAMPLES Step 27 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 Example 14 shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at nonuniform time intervals This example assumes the sampler is configured for extended programming and that it connected to a Liquid Level Actuator The actuator will inhibit the sampler until the liquid level rises to contact the actuator probe The sampler is to take 24 samples the first samples are to occur at 10 minute intervals for an hour the next samples at 20 minute intervals for an hour and the remaining samples at 30 minute intervals One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle Although this example assumes that nonuniform times are being used with the actuator uniform time intervals or flow intervals can be used with the actuator as well Example 14 Time paced samples at nonuniform time intervals Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select TIME TIME FLOW STORM Steps PACED SAMPLING Select NONUNIFORM UNIFORM NONUNIFORM Step 4 TIME INTERVALS Select YES to modify the sequence of nonuniform time entries MODIFY SEQUENCE Step 5 LYES NO 91 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Enter the total number of samples 24
37. BOTTLE CHANGE Display 6 AT 10 00 19 JUN Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The current time is shown in the lower right corner The sampling program requires four bottles per sample event and that the bottle sets be switched on a time basis This display alternates with the display illustrated in item 8 at 3 second intervals SAMPLE 2 BTLS 1 4 Display 7 AT 6 00 5 42 33 Indicates the time of the next bottle set switch NEXT SET CHANGE Display 8 AT8 00 19 JUN Indicates a sample in progress BOTTLE 1 Display 9 PUMPING 200 ml Example 23 Run State Displays Flow paced sampling Indicates the programmed start time of a flow paced sampling program when no sample is to be taken at the start time The first line reports the programmed start time and date the second line reports the current time and date START AT 6 00 19 JUN Display 1 5 42 43 19 JUN Indicates the programmed start time of a flow paced sampling program when a sample is to be taken at the start time The current time appears in the lower right corner The sampling program requires one bottle per sample event BOTTLE 1 Display 2 AT 6 00 5 42 33 Indicates the bottle number of the next sequential sample The second line reports the number of flow pulses remaining until the next sample event BOTTLE 1 Display 3 AFTER 5PULSES Indi
38. Chapter 5 provides information about sampler options and accessories It contains instructions for converting your sampler to a single bottle compos ite sampler and for connecting it to Isco and non Isco flow meters and other related interfaces Chapter 6 describes basic maintenance operations including cleaning procedures suction line and pump tubing replacement and battery maintenance Chapter 7 contains servicing information for the sampler and discusses removal and disassembly of the control box removal of the pump and distribu tor gear case and care of CMOS circuitry Appendix A Replacement Parts Listing con tains an illustrated parts breakdown Appendix B Accessories lists accessory compo nents for the Isco 3700 Sampler Appendix C Display Index briefly discusses the displays used to program the sampler Input displays are listed numerically a brief explanation accompanies each listed display Appendix D Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples demonstrates the calculations needed to estimate the flow increment between samples Appendix E Glossary a list of terms unique to this manual Appendix F Material Safety Data Sheets Introduction The 3700 Standard Portable Sampler is a program mable liquid sampler and is one of Isco s 3700 Series of portable and refrigerated samplers The extensive sampling capabilities easy flexible pro gramming and durable construction make the 3700 Se
39. E e uz4 _ e g n E E OUT T T 4 in i cis Ge Cea ces 4 R75 LIAE Cas o cae Roa CRi 4 RES m o ni I L f aes Ree 4 4 m 1 TPS 1 E Y REZ GUT 4 r5 o g i N i J L R74 1 id E 4 H o 1 1 RS 2 4 uu o D54 as L T tg Cte R74 u LZ m CRO ug uH Roe ERZIRBEZA G4 S o u us 1 u 1 x i 1 1 9 sp 1 N m n n r D 3 rr T T T T T T T OUT Ny H ON Re REB M u RA 4 wh on GE 547 i m ERA PEEL d a7 RSSICRE REB 513 RH ERE RES REH RES 11 R38 R 4 Cat pm m CH7 CRA 1 pu m o r47 UN n m JL ces ni nm m u C o 1 1 1 Lp My ue m cea EN B4 m Jh f TE Hm cea o t m m m yr R3H CPE u Reg 954 CR4n J 4 Y R34 Cag J 1 RSE 4 ze l Lu 1 R416 Hit zs 9 u4 Raz our T i i nj 7 L o RE LE R46 I Ret o 4 R47 011 5 91 ZB 56 PET u 1 PUI m m CRY ca EE CRS 1 F cea RZ 21 R12 R45 gia uis 130 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 43 Case Schematic Diagram
40. Enter preferred count Program Lock 360 Select ENABLE or DISABLE as preferred Sampler ID 365 Enter appropriate ID Run Diagnostics No setting required 75 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Programming the Sampler for a Storm Routine The extended programming mode contains two program sequences The first sequence contains the displays for time and flow paced routines The second sequence contains the displays for STORM paced routines Figures 17 and 18 shows first sequence displays Figure 19 shows the STORM displays The storm input displays are divided into three sections The first section contains the displays that control the pacing and distribution to the first bottle group The second section contains the dis plays that control the pacing and distribution for the second bottle group The third section controls the start time for the routine and may include cali bration and manual suction head displays First Section Settings for the first bottle group The first section contains the input dis plays that Set a delay to the first sample event of the first bottle group e Set the time pacing for the first bottle group e Allocate the bottles for the first bottle group Determine sample distribution for the first bot tle group sequential samples per bottle multi plexing bottles per sample multiplexing or multi bottle compositing Figure 23 Storm Sampling Flow
41. One Bottle Set SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Sample Distribution More Than One Bottle Per Sample Event More Than One Bottle Set J 4 One Botttle Per Sample Event Display 31 12 or less Bottles Per Sample Event SAMPLES PER Display 41 Display 40 BOTTLE 1 MAX CHANGE SETS BASED CHANGE BOTTLES BASED ON TIME SAMPLES BTL ON TIME SAMPLES Crime Crime Count Display 43 NL Display 45 Display 42 Display 44 CHANGE SETS AFTER CHANGE SETS AFTER CHANGE BOTTLES AFTER CHANGE BOTTLES AFTER HOURS MINUTES SAMPLES HOURS MINUTES SAMPLES Corer Display 48 SAMPLE CONTINUOUSLY YES NO Continued on Figure 18 66 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 18 Extended Programming Mode Sample Volume and Key Times Continued from Figure 17 Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml EACH 1 MAX Display 70 tert accede 1 SUCTION HEAD OF FEET 1 MAX Sample Volume Display 80 CALIBRATE SAMPLE VOLUME YES NO Key Times Display 90 ENTER START TIME Yes YES NO Chan Display 91 NA Display 92 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT START FLOW COUNT AT HH MM DD MM HH MM DD MM Change Bottles Sets Change Bottles Sets Based on Time Based on Sa
42. Supports combustion tolerate down to 12 poor ventilation and Minutes Safe 8 hr absorption or chemi exposure 14 to 16 cal Below 10 danger consumption of oxy ous to life Below 5 to gen 7 probably fatal Ozone Irritant and poisonous 1 66 Max naturally occur 0 08 0 04 ET cun Near bottom Where ozone is used Detectable odor at 03 Strong electrical odor ring level 0 4 ppm 0 5 for disinfection 0 015 ppm Strong oxidizer Colorless ppm causes irritation of At 1 ppm strong sulphur eyes and nose 1 to 10 like odor ppm causes headache nausea can cause coma Symptoms simi lar to radiation dam age Sludge Mostly a simple asphyx Variable Will not support life No data Would vary 5 3 19 3 Near top of structure From digestion of See components Gas iant May be practically widely with composition sludge odorless colorless Sulfur Colorless pungent odor 2 26 Inflammation of the 50 10 oyan At bottom can com Industrial waste com Detectable taste and Dioxide Suffocating corrosive poi eyes 400 to 500 ppm to bine with water to bustion common air odor at low concentra S05 sonous nonflammable immediately fatal 100 form sulfurous acid pollutant tions Toluene Colorless benzene like 3 14 At 200 500 ppm head 200 100 1 27 7 0 At bottom Solvent Combustible gas indi C7H8 odor ache nausea bad cator taste lassitude Turpentine Colorless characteristic 4 84 Eye irritation head e 100 0 8 __ At bottom Solvent used
43. TRIPPED Display Status You can access a summary of the current program settings and the results of the most recent sampling routine with the DISPLAY STATUS key This key is valid in both the run and standby states The summary of the program set tings consists of a number of informational dis plays describing the settings The results of the sampling program include information about each sample event and reports problems encountered during the program This information remains in memory until you start another program You can retrieve this information with Isco s Field Printer or a laptop computer running Isco s SAM PLINK software Both methods produce two reports that contain the sampler ID current sta tus program settings and sampling results 103 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler If a sampling routine is in progress when you press the DISPLAY STATUS key the sampling routine will be suspended No samples will be taken until you exit Display Status If the pump count reaches the number entered for the Tubing Life Warning setting the Pump Tubing Warning will be displayed An illustration of the warning is shown below WARNING Replace pump tubing Display Status The sampler tracks and reports the following items program start time and date sample volume source of each sample event cause of any missed samples start time of each sample event number of pump counts to liquid det
44. The flow meter will disable a sampler only when the conditions are not satisfied Terminating the Routine A storm routine will terminate under the following conditions e The sampler completes the routine e A flow meter disables the sampler when the enable control condition is no longer satisfied Once a sampler running a storm routine has been disabled however it cannot be re enabled if control conditions are satisfied again You can prevent the sampler from being disabled by latching the sampler enable through the flow meter s control condition e The time between flow paced sample events exceeds the storm routine s maximum flow interval setting Manual Samples Manual sampling is not avail able during a storm routine If you press MANUAL SAMPLE during a storm routine the sampler will disregard the key Run State Displays Run state displays for storm routines are identical to displays used with conventional routines However the displays for the first and second bottle groups will alternate with each other Table 10 Recommended configuration settings for storm sampling Configure Option Display No Recommended Setting Set Clock 210 Enter correct time and date Bottles and Sizes Portable Refrig 220 either compact stan Select 4 12 or 24 depending on your model bottle 2481224 sampling the storm branch is not accessible For 3700 Standa
45. The second line indicates the scheduled time of the sample and displays the current time in the right corner 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 15 AT 6 00 5 55 33 When the scheduled sample event time arrives the second line disappears while the sampler completes the pre sample purge Step 16 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 When the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample sample delivery is indicated by the word PUMPING followed by the sample volume The message remains through the post sample purge 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 200 ml When the sampling cycle is completed the display again indicates the upcoming sample 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 17 6 15 6 00 26 41 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The next displays shown here in Steps 78 through 20 show the displays as the sample volumes are deposited in Bottle 1 Step 18 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 200 ml 3 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 19 AT 6 30 6 15 27 Step 20 3 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 3 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 200 ml L Step 21 When the final sample has been deposited in the first bottle the display changes to indicate the new sample bottle This display indicates that the upcoming sample event will place the first of four sample volumes in Bottle 2 at 7 00 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 2 Step 22 AT 7 00 6 45 25 This display appears as the pump begins the pre
46. There are two types of multiplexing samples per bottle and bot tles per sample Samples per Bottle Multiplexing In samples per bottle multiplexing the 3700 deposits a num ber of individual samples in the same bottle Sam ples per bottle multiplexing is useful when you need to collect a series of small composite samples In samples per bottle multiplexing users can mod ify the normal sampling cycle relocate distributor pre sample purge sample delivery post sample purge by altering the number of times the distrib utor is relocated 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Because a bottle will receive more than one sample from more than one sample event the distributor does not relocate to a new bottle at each sample event At the first sample event the distributor relocates if necessary to the appropriate bottle The normal sampling cycle is completed At the next sample event the distributor does not relocate and a second sample is deposited into the same bottle Figure 10 Samples Per Bottle Multiplexing Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EA ZA f 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 Sample Event Number Figure 11 Bottles Per Sample Multiplexing Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Sample Event N
47. U S without a sewer fatality from H5S8 as well as deaths elsewhere in the world 17 The presence of H5S in a sewer atmosphere is eas ily determined bellows and ampoule type of tester is very satisfactory for the purpose even though it is only crudely quantitative When using a tester of this type do not bring the air to the ampoule by way of a tube as this may change the 5 concentration Hang the ampoule in the air to be tested with a suction tube to the bulb or bellows Lead acetate paper is very useful as a qualitative indicator It cannot be used to estimate the amount of sulfide but it will quickly turn black in an atmo sphere containing only a tenth of a lethal concen tration Electrodes or other similar electrical indicating devices for HS in air have been marketed Some of them are known to be unreliable and we know of none that have proved dependable Do not use one unless you check it at frequent intervals against air containing known H5S concentrations A sup posed safety device that is unreliable is worse than none at all Remember that the nose fails too when it comes to sensing dangerous concentrations of HS Various other toxic gases have been mentioned in some publications It is unlikely that any person has been asphyxiated in a sewer by any of those other gases except possibly chlorine The vapor of gaso line and other hydrocarbons is sometimes present in amounts that could cause discomfo
48. Use Leak Procedures Steps to be Taken if Material Is Sweep or vacuum the spilled material and place in a waste disposal container Avoid raising Spilled Or Released dust Waste Disposal Dispose in an approved landfill according to federal state and local regulations Methods Precautions to Taken Cover promptly to avoid blowing dust Wash after handling In Handling and Storage Other Precautions and or Special Hazards Keep in sealed container away from moisture Clay will readily adsorb moisture 177 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 178 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ISM1 A Application of Council Directive Manufacturer s Name Manufacturer s Address Equipment Type Environment Trade Name Model No Year of Issue Standards to which Conformity is Declared 89 336 EEC The EMC Directive Isco Inc 4700 Superior Lincoln Nebraska 68504 USA Mailing Address P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 Laboratory Equipment for Light Industrial Commercial Environments Model 3700 Sampler 1996 EN 50082 1 Generic Immunity for Commercial Light Industrial Environment EN 55011 Limits and methods of radio disturbance characteristics Standard Description Severity Applied Performance Criteria IEC 801 2 Electrostatic Discharge Level 3 4kV contact discharge B Level 2 8kV air discharge B IEC 801 3 Radiated RF Immunity 27 MHz to 500MHz A Level 2 V m IEC 801 4 Electrical
49. VDC supplied by battery or AC power converter Sampler standby current 10 mA maximum Power Pack Requirements Use only Isco made power packs certified by UL Part 60 1684 088 N 120 VAC x 12VAC 60 Hz 1 0 Amp Note This is the only version certified by UL The line cord mains connect cable is the Disconect Device External Isco Nickel Cadmium Battery Note Not certified by UL 7 standard sampling programs 24 samples at a rate of one 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of 8 vinyl suction line at a 5 ft head External Isco Lead Acid Battery Note Not certified by UL 11 standard sampling programs 24 samples at a rate of one 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of 3g in vinyl suction line at a 5 ft head Controller Internal 3V Lithium Battery Isco 340 5000 00 Replace with same type see figure 37 5 years minimum maintains internal logic and program settings 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 2 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Compact Sampler continued Environmental Installation Maximum Altitude Installation Category Pollution Degree 2 000 Meters 95 RA Maximum Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 degrees F 0 to 50 degrees C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 degrees F 20 to 60 degrees C Pump and Tubing Specifications Suction Tubing intake 3 to 99 ft lengths of 1 ID vinyl 38 in ID vinyl
50. You can load a stored programmed only when the sampler is configured for the extended programming mode To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key Step 5 SELECT OPTION PROGRAMMING MODE Select EXTENDED Press the enter program key to accept the selection Step 6 BASIC EXTENDED PROGRAMMING MODE Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the Load Stored Program configure option Step 7 SELECT OPTION lt gt LOAD STORED PROGRAM Select the number of the program you want to load Select NONE when you do not want to load a program Step 8 LOAD PROGRAM 1 2 3 NONE When the sampler has loaded the program it will display the next configure option When you are done config uring the sampler press EXIT PROGRAM to return to Standby Step 9 SELECT OPTION lt gt SAVE CURRENT PROGRAM After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to run the program Step 10 10 37 23 STANDBY 19 JUN 91 55 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Save Current Program The Save Current Program option allows you to assign a different number to as many as three sampling routines and save those numbers This option eliminates the need to reprogram the sampler for recurrent routines Only the program settings are saved if different routines require dif ferent configurations you must reconfigure th
51. You can take manual samples in standby by pressing the MANUAL SAMPLE key After you press the MANUAL SAMPLE key the sampler will deliver the programmed sample volume to the bot tle currently under the distributor A manual sam ple delivers the sample volume currently entered as a programmed setting and includes the pre sample and post sample purges It will also include any pro grammed rinses and retries The sampling process can be stopped with the STOP key at any time If you press the MANUAL SAMPLE key while a sampling program is in progress the manual sample will be counted as one of the programmed samples While the sample is being delivered the sampler displays a message similar to that illustrated in f The second line will not appear until the pump begins to pump forward to deliver the sample The display will revert to standby after the manual sample has been delivered MANUAL SAMPLE PUMPING 200 ml 101 Next Bottle If you want to reposition the distrib utor use the NEXT BOTTLE key The sampler will advance the distributor to the next bottle position The sampler determines the bottle positions by referring to the Bottle Number configuration set ting The sampler will display the distributor s location as illustrated in g After a short time the display will revert to standby If the distributor is over the last bottle position when you press next bottle the distributor will move to Bottle 1
52. and s inch ID vinyl tube is available in 100 and 500 foot rolls Cut the bulk suction line to even foot lengths The vinyl suction tubing contains a very low PPM parts per million level of phenols If this affects your samples use the Teflon suction line Replacement Teflon Line Isco offers 3 inch ID Teflon suction line in lengths of 10 and 25 feet Vinyl Suction Line The following sections discuss the replacement of the complete suction line strainer assemblies the sizing of the suction line and the assembly and installation of the bulk tubing Remove the suction line from the pump tubing by detaching the tube coupling per Attaching the Vinyl Suction Line to the Pump Tubing in Chapter 2 If you must use a completely new suction line strainer assembly of the standard 10 or 25 foot length install it as described in Attaching the Vinyl Suction Line to the Pump Tubing Bulk Suction Line If you are using bulk suction line to replace the old line detach the old line from the tube coupling Remove the strainer by loosen ing the hose clamp that secures the strainer to the line Cut the new suction line to the desired length in 1 foot increments The line must be between 3 and 99 feet long 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler To ensure accurate sample volumes be sure that the line is cut in 1 foot increments and that the line length is correctly entered in the Suction Line configure option Install the strain
53. and lock nut attaching the rotor to the pump shaft Figure 32 Interior of Liquid Detector and Pump Tube in Chapter 6 shows the location of the machine screw Rotate the rotor until you can reach the screw with a screwdriver inserted through the pump case inlet sleeve Slide the rotor off the pump shaft Remove the pump case by unscrewing the four screws on the back of the pump s inner case Carefully lift the pump gear case assembly out of the control box The pump gear case can be reinstalled by revers ing these steps Ensure that you replace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps 125 Precautions for Servicing CMOS Circuitry Most of the circuitry in the 3700 Portable Samplers is made up of CMOS components Because of the oxide gate structure of these devices they are extremely susceptible to destruction caused by the discharge of static electricity through their inputs Because of this risk you must take certain precau tions when working on these circuits Hazard of Static Electricity The voltage levels present from static buildup from walking over car peted floors movement of woolen or synthetic clothes over chair seats workbenches etc are high enough to destroy CMOS circuitry when you are performing repair work Ideally all tools soldering irons etc should be grounded and you should conduct all work on a grounded metal workbench with a grounding strap worn around your wrist Obvi
54. and no gravity fed internal tubing Each sampling cycle includes an air pre sample purge and post sample purge to clear the suction line both before and after sampling These features make the 3700s ideal for both suspended solid and toxic material sampling Cross con tamination between samples is minimized and sites for sediment accumulation in the system are eliminated Materials in contact with the sample fluid are limited to the strainer suction line pump tubing and collection bottles You can easily and safely clean the system by replacing relatively inexpensive lengths of tubing Pump speed is approximately 250 RPM which generates a velocity sufficient to obtain represen tative samples The pumping rate of 3 500 ml per minute is generated when using 4 inch ID suction line at 3 feet of head The line transport velocity using the same suction line and head is 2 5 feet per second Pump speed does not significantly affect volumetric accuracy because the delivered volume is based on a patented electronic count of the number of pump revolutions Liquid Detector The LD90 gives the 3700s the ability to deliver accurate repeatable sample vol umes regardless of changing head conditions Typi cal sample volumes are accurate to within 10 of the programmed volume and repeatable to within 10 ml When concerns of cross contamination arise the detector and a programmable setting provide for automatic rinsing of the s
55. at a rate of 1 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of 8 8 vinyl suction line at a 5 ft head Controller Internal 3VDC Lithium Battery Isco 340 5000 00 Replace with same type see fig 37 N 5 years minimum maintains internal logic and program settings Environmental Installation Maximum Altitude 2 000 Meters Installation Category Pollution Degree 95 RH Maximum icm SE RHMamum Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 degrees 0 to 50 degrees C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 degrees F C20 to 60 degrees C Clock Specifications Real Time Clock Accuracy 1 min month typical Pump and Tubing Specifications 3 to 99 foot lengths of 1 ID vinyl 38 inch ID vinyl 3fg inch ID Teflon lined 26 ft 7 9 m max 1 4 in ID suction tubing 3000 ml min 3fg in ID suction tubing 3500 ml min 4 in ID suction tubing 5 1 ft sec 3fg in ID suction tubing 2 5 ft sec Suction Tubing intake Suction Lift Pumping Rate at 3 ft of head Line Transport Velocity at 3 ft of head 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 1 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Standard Sampler continued Sample Specifications Sample Volume Accuracy With the liquid detector enabled and automatic compensation for head typically the greater of 10 or 20 ml over a head range of 1 to 12 feet and sampler
56. automatically turn itself off as part of the reinitialization process Select NO if you do not want to reinitialize the settings Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection REINITIALIZE Step 28 YES NO The steps in Example 2 program the sampler to take samples every 30 minutes Each bottle is to receive one 250 ml sample volume The sampling routine is to begin according to the start time delay one minute after you press the START SAMPLING key Example 2 Time paced sequential sampling If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on The standby display shown here will appear Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 5 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Because PROGRAM will already be selected blink ing press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept it and move to the next step PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER To enter the interval between samples in time increments select TIME If TIME is already blinking press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection If FLOW is blinking press the LEFT ARROW key once so that TIME blinks Then press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept TIME TIME FLOW Step 3 PACED SAMPLING This display requires two entries one for the hours one for the minutes Enter 0 to set the hours at zero P
57. compositing This requires the composite con version kit which contains the extra equipment needed to adapt the sampler for composite sam pling Conversion procedures are discussed in the instruction sheets provided with the conver sion kit With the 3700 Compact you merely insert the bottle into the base You can combine the types of sample pacing and sample distribution Thus you can take time or flow paced sequential samples and time or flow paced composite samples Each combination of pac ing is noted below Time Paced Sequential In a time paced sequen tial sample samples are collected at equal incre ments of time Each bottle receives one sample Flow Paced Sequential In a flow paced sequen tial sample samples are collected at equal volumes of flow as measured by an associated flow meter Each bottle receives one sample Time Paced Composite In a composite time sample the individual samples are combined into a single container Samples are collected at equal increments of time Flow Paced Composite In a composite flow sample the individual samples are combined into a single container Samples are collected at equal increments of flow volume as measured by an associated flow meter Multiplexing You can multiplex both time paced and flow paced sequential samples Multiplexing places more than one sample in a bottle at differ ent sample events or places a sample in several bottles at the same sample event
58. date of the second stop time 1 30 PM or 13 30 You must enter the times in military time STOP SAMPLING AT Step 16 2 13 3019 JUN Enter the time and date the program should resume 4 00 PM or 16 00 in military time STOP SAMPLING AT Step 17 2 13 3019 JUN Enter the time and date the program should resume 4 00 PM or 16 00 in military time STOP SAMPLING AT Step 18 3 18 0019 JUN After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 19 COMPLETE Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 20 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here START SAMPLING Step 21 BOTTLE 1 1 24 This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right BOTTLE 1 Step 22 AT 6 00 10 38 07 96 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When the start time arrives the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with a pre sample purge During the purge the display indicate
59. distributor and pump and lets you reinitial ize RAM The display information is discussed below in order of appearance Software Revision Number The sampler will display the software revision number for a short period of time Test RAM and ROM RAM and ROM test mes sages replaced the software revision display A suc cessful test is indicated by the messages RAM PASSED TEST or ROM PASSED TEST If either RAM or ROM fail the test the sampler displays one of the following messages RAM FAILED TEST or ROM FAILED TEST and beeps every three seconds until you turn it off If either the RAM or ROM fail the test service the sampler Contact Isco Customer Service for assistance 61 LCD Test After successful RAM and ROM tests the sampler will then test the LCD by first filling the display with solid rectangles and then printing the alphabet and other characters Each character position in the display should contain a character Pump Test The next step tests the pump During the test the pump will run briefly and the display will indicate an OFF ON number The number should fall within the range of 50 to 200 If the count falls below 50 or exceeds 200 have the pump serviced A count near 100 is typical Distributor Test Following the pump test you can test the distributor If you elect to test the dis tributor the sampler will move the distributor to Position 24 then return it to Position 1
60. euo LTIME FLOW STORM PACED SAMPLING Select UNIFORM Step 4 UNIFORM NONUNIFORM P TIME INTERVALS Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry SAMPLE EVERY Step 5 0 HOURS 10 MINUTES Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 SAMPLE EVERY Step 6 0 HOURS 15 MINUTES Enter 1 to set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 1 BOTTLES PER Stepy SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Select SAMPLES CHANGE BOTTLES BASED ON SAMPLES BTL Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY 1SAMPLES 1 8 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 500ml 10 1000 95 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Select YES ENTER START TIME LYES NO Enter the start time and date of the sampling program 6 00 AM tomorrow Step 11 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT Step 12 06 00 19 JUN Enter 5 There are three stop times and two resume times 5 STOP or RESUME Step 13 TIMES 0 24 Enter the time and date of the first stop time 8 00 AM STOP SAMPLING AT Step 14 1 08 0019 JUN Enter the time and date the program should resume 11 00 AM RESUME SAMPLING AT Step 15 1 11 0019 JUN Enter the time and
61. guide contains the following information How to connect the sampler and rain gauge to the flow meter Programming examples for flow meters and samplers How to start and restart the monitoring instal lation Equipment Checklist The equipment listed below is suggested for typical storm event monitor ing 3700 Sampler and power source You can use a 2 4 8 or 24 bottle configura tion for STORM routines depending on which 3700 model you have e 3200 or 4200 Series Flow Meter or a 4100 Series Flow Logger and power source e A Sampler to Flow Meter Connect Cable Optional Rain gauge with cable and connector Rain gauges are required for rain event trig gered sampling Optional FLOWLINK software requires IBM compatible computer system Although the flow meter contains the sampler enable conditions most often used in storm water runoff monitoring you can use the FLOWLINK system to download many addi tional sample enable conditions to the flow meter Refer to the FLOWLINK Instruction Manual for more information Optional Interrogator communication line kit to connect a computer to the flow meter This kit provides the computer to flow meter cabling Isco Flow Meters can also be equipped with a modem to communicate with FLOW LINK over standard telephone lines Optional Solar Panel Battery Charger Installation Checklist This checklist summa rizes the four steps required to set up a sto
62. in accordance with applicable federal state or local laws and regulations No Information Available Doc 50 Updated April 4 1994 Page 4 175 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Material Safety Data Sheet Identity Trade Name as Used on Label formerty Muttiform Desiccants Inc Address 325 Harlem Road CAS Number Buffalo NY 14224 E Phone Number For information 716 824 8900 Date Prepared April 19 1996 Emergency Phone Number 716 824 8900 Prepared McKed Section 1 Material identification and Information Components Chemical Name amp Common Names Com OTHER LIMITS Hazardous Components 1 or greater Carcinogens 0 1 or greater PEL TLV RECOMMENDED Montmorillonite Cla 86 93 NA Crystalline silica quartz 2 4 2mg m 0 1 mg m respirable respirable dust dust eee eee Non Hazardous ingredients Paper Boiling Poit Vapor Pressure E mm Hg and Temperature i Vapor Density Air 21 Solubility Not soluble but will adsorb moisture Water in Water Reactive Appearance Paper pouch containing tan powder and Odor i Flash Point Auto lgniion i Methods Used Temperature Air by Volume Water is best extinguishing medium but dry chemical carbon dioxide and foam can be used ia i Special Fire None The paper pouch will burn but the clay will not Fighting Procedures Unusual Fire and Explosi
63. in paint 1 Detectable odor at C10H16 odor ache dizziness nau low concentrations sea irritation of the 2 Combustible gas kidneys indicator Xylene Colorless Flammable 3 66 Narcotic in high con YL 2 100 1 1 7 0 At bottom Solvent Combustible gas indi C8H0 centrations Less toxic cator than benzene Table Notes 1 Specific Gravity is also known as Vapor Density 2 Physiological effects given for concentrations over 0 3 3 Explosive range given in percent by volume in air 4 Sludge gas consists predominately of methane and carbon dioxide with small amounts of hydrogen nitrogen hydrogen sulfide and oxygen occasionally traces of carbon monoxide 19 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 4 Programming Guidelines Introduction This chapter Programming Guidelines discusses in detail the sampling features of the 3700 Porta ble Samplers and the procedures for programming your sampler Isco has found that the most effective way to learn to program the 3700 Sampler is to read this chap ter with a sampler in front of you The time that you spend in the office or laboratory actually pro gramming the sampler and observing its operation is usually time well spent If you are already familiar with the sampling capabilities of the 3700 Sampler you may prefer to begin with the section entitled Programming Introduction on page 24 This section introduces the specifics of programming the sampler
64. is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically re turn to the standby state Step 15 PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program Step 16 STANDBY 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here Step 17 START SAMPLING BOTTLE 1 1 24 92 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears while the Actuator is inhibiting the sampler The second line indicates the current time and date SAMPLER INHIBITED Step 18 10 35 20 JUN 91 This display appears when the sampler becomes enabled and counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right BOTTLE 1 Step 19 11 26 11 25 47 When the start time occurs the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with a pre sample purge During the purge the display indicates the receiving bottle number Step 20 BOTTLE 1 As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge
65. is some what more flexible in the extended programing mode than in the basic mode In the extended mode you can switch multiplexed bottles or bottle sets after a programmed number of samples have been deposited or after a programmed period of time has elapsed Under most conditions we rec ommend you switch bottles or sets after collecting a programmed number of samples This allows you to control the number of samples in each bottle When you switch bottles or sets on a time basis the total volume of each bottle or bottle set may vary in samples per bottle multiplexing Multiple Bottle Compositing The extended programming mode offers a third multiplexing pos sibility multiple bottle compositing Multiple bot tle compositing combines samples per bottle and bottles per sample multiplexing by depositing mul tiple samples in a bottle set At each sample event the sampler places a sample into each bottle of a set This is repeated until each bottle of the set contains a programmed number of samples Fig ure 12 illustrates multiple bottle compositing You can switch the bottle sets after a programmed number of samples have been deposited or after a programmed period of time elapses Multiple bot tle compositing is useful when you want a series of identical sets of samples or a larger volume com posite sample than you can collect in one bottle You can use multiple bottle compositing with time paced or flow paced routines Stops an
66. key five times The standby display will be replaced by the input display illustrated below English German Spanish French 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Select the preferred language from this display If Select the units from this display After you ve made you select French Spanish or German the sampler the selection the sampler will convert the units of will automatically convert English units of measure measure as required and return to standby to metric units and return to standby If you select English a second input display will appear ere Example 10 shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 30 minutes starting at 8 00 AM tomorrow placing one 500 ml sample in each bottle Example 10 Time paced sampling Uniform time intervals Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM SE PROGRAM NONUNIFORM ep TIME INTERVALS Select TIME Meas TIME FLOW STORM PACED SAMPLING Select UNIFORM UNIFORM NONUNIFORM TIME INTERVALS entry SAMPLE EVERY Step 5 0 HOURS 10 MINUTES Enter 30 to set the minutes entry to 30 Gat SAMPLE EVERY ep 0 HOURS 30 MINUTES Enter 1 to set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 1 BOTTLES PE
67. may be calculated by multiplying the programmed nom inal sample volume by the total number of samples to be collected In the example 125 ml sample x 50 samples 6 250 ml This calculated total volume may vary from the actual total volume because of variations in the actual volume of each individual sample The total time needed to collect the 50 individual samples may vary from the desired 24 hour period because of variations in the average flow rate from the 2 5 figure used in these calculations 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix E Glossary Bottles per sample Bottles per sample is the number of bottles receiving sample volumes at each sample event Composite sampling In composite sampling multiple sample volumes are placed in bottle sets Typically composite sampling uses a single con tainer A composite sample represents an average of the characteristics of the flow stream for the elapsed time of sampling Controller The controller is a collection of elec tronic components which govern the actions of the sampler It includes the microprocessor RAM Random Access Memory ROM Read Only Mem ory and its imbedded software the LCD Liquid Crystal Display and the keypad Cross contamination Cross contamination occurs when portions of previous samples are mixed with the current sample For example cross contamination results when residual amounts of sample remain in the suction line or p
68. needed If large quantities are ingested seek medical advice SECTION V FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES Flash Point Not Applicable Auto Ignition Not Determined LEL Not Determined UEL Not Determined NFPA HAZARD CLASSIFICATION Health 0 Flammable 0 Reactivity 0 HMIS HAZARD CLASSIFICATION Health 1 Flammable 0 Reactivity 0 Indicates the possibility of chronic health effects See Chronic Health Hazards in Section III for more information EXTINGUISHING MEDIA Use water carbon dioxide or foam SPECIAL FIRE FIGHTING PROCEDURES Wear positive pressure self contained breathing apparatus in fire conditions 165 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 4 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 UNUSUAL FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARDS Not a fire or explosion hazard SECTION VI ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES Contain spillage and scoop up or vacuum Avoid dusting NOTE In the event of an accidental release of this material the above procedures should be followed Additionally proper exposure controls and personal protection equipment should be used see Section VIII Exposure Control Personal Protection and disposal of the material should be in accordance with Section XI Disposal Considerations SECTION VII HANDLING AND STORAGE Use dustless systems for handling storage and clean up so that airborne dust does not exceed the PEL Use adequate ventilation and dust collection Pract
69. nonuniform times you can use the program storage feature to save the programs using each sequence Extended Mode Sample Distribution The extended Sample Distribution section expands the multiplexing capabilities of the sampler Both the bottles per sample and samples per bottle mul tiplexing are available however the procedure used to program them differs slightly from the pro cedure used in the basic programming mode Example 11 demonstrates the procedure used for samples per bottle multiplexing Example 12 shows the bottles per sample multiplexing proce dure The extended mode also offers multiple bot tle compositing refer to Example 13 In the extended programming mode you can switch bottles or bottle sets after a programmed time period elapses or after a programmed number of samples have been deposited The displays used to specify the type of switches are shown in the Sample Distribution section of Figures 17 18 and 19 Display 40 allows you to select either TIME or SAMPLES If you select TIME the 65 bottles can be changed after a programmed period of time If you select SAMPLES the bottles can be switched after a programmed number of sam ples In Display 41 which allows you to switch bottle sets you can select either TIME or SAM PLES BTL If you select TIME the bottle sets can be changed after a programmed period of time If you select SAMPLES BTL the bottle se
70. ond bottle group of a storm routine Select TIME for time pacing or FLOW for flow pacing TIME FLOW Display 14 SECOND BOTTLE GROUP This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Enter the amount of time between the sam pler s enabling and the first sample event for the first bottle group occurs ___ MINUTE DELAY TO Display 15 FIRST GROUP SAMPLE This display is the first input display of the flow segment of a storm program Select DURING to collect sam ples for the first and second bottle groups concurrently Select AFTER to collect samples for the second bottle group after the sampler has filled the first bottle group DURING AFTER Display 16 FIRST GROUP This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Enter the amount of time between the time the sampler is enabled and the first sample event for the second bottle group ___ MINUTE DELAY TO Display 17 SECOND GROUP SAMPLE This display follows Display 11 when you have selected NONUNIFORM Select YES to modify the exist ing nonuniform intervals Select NO to leave the nonuniform intervals unchanged MODIFY SEQUENCE Display 20 NO In the basic programming mode this display appears after you have selected TIME in Display 10 In the extended programming mode this display appears when you have selected UNIFORM in Dis
71. one bottle during a sample event Sample volume The sample volume is the dis crete programmed amount of sample delivered to each bottle A single sample event may deliver sev eral sample volumes Samples per bottle Samples per bottle is the number of discrete sample volumes placed in each bottle Sampling program See sampling routine Sampling routine A sampling routine also called a sampling program is the process of taking samples according to the program settings you enter when programming and configuring the con troller The program settings define the sample pacing distribution volume and key clock times Selection A selection is represented by a blink ing word or number in an input display The blink ing selection indicates the current choice or value Selections are accepted and stored by pressing the enter program key Suction head Suction head is the vertical dis tance from the surface of the flow stream to the pump inlet 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix F Material Safety Data Sheets Code J96001 Date 23 DEC 1993 Printed 05 JAN 1994 ENGELHARD MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Product DESICCITEU 25 SECTION I CHEMICAL PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION Common Name BENTONITE HEAT ACTIVATED GRANULES Chemical Name BENTONITE HEAT ACTIVATED GRANULES Formula MONTMORILLONITE CLAY Product CAS No 1302 78 93 Product Use Drying agent Supplier ENGELHARD C
72. only preparation necessary will be to remove the bottle caps You can store these bottle caps in the center of the base if you are not using ice For subsequent uses place new or cleaned bottles in the base Take care that all bottles are fitted properly into the base before replacing the bottle retaining ring All 24 bottles must be installed in 10 the base to assure that they are properly held in place The bottle numbers molded into the base indicate the order in which the bottles are filled Preparation of the 3700 Compact Base Section On the 3700 Compact the inner sleeve is numeri cally coded to indicate which bottle is which You can choose whichever bottle configuration s you wish for your sampler when you order it The cen ter section of the 3700 Compact is keyed so it will only go on the proper way because it is important that the distributor arm stops at the first bottle to ensure proper sequencing Bottles Glass Bottles In the 3700 Standard install the stainless steel retaining ring for the glass bottles inside the circle of bottles It expands outwardly to hold the bottles firmly against the interior wall of the base Remove the retaining ring from the base by squeezing the ends of the ring together and lifting the ring out of the base Plastic Bottles The retaining ring for the plastic bottles in the portable sampler rests on top of the slanted portion of the bottles Mildew resistant polypropylene j
73. or by e mail without returning the instrument to the factory Instruments needing factory repair should be packed carefully preferably in the original carton and shipped to the attention of the service department Small non fragile items can be sent by insured parcel post PLEASE BE SURE TO ENCLOSE A NOTE EXPLAINING THE DEFECT Return instruments to Isco Inc Attention Repair Service 4700 Superior Street Lincoln NE 68504 USA Mailing address sco Inc PO Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 USA Phone Repair service 800 775 2965 instruments 800 228 4373 samplers amp flowmeters Sales amp General Information 800 228 4373 USA amp Canada Fax 402 465 3001 Email service isco com Isco Inc November 2000 2217
74. pro gramming mode A listing of the capabilities is in Table 6 The extended programming mode pro vides several additional capabilities Nonuniform Time Pacing an additional multiplexing scheme multiple bottle compositing Sampling Stops and Resumes program storage and Flow Mode Sam pling controls The procedure for programming the sampler in the extended mode is the same as that used to pro gram the sampler in the basic programming mode There are some exceptions however The extended mode modifies the sections of the program sequence to allow you to take advantage of the additional features The Sample Pacing program 64 section is extended to include settings for nonuni form times The Sample Distribution section is modified to let you program the sampler for multi ple bottle compositing The procedure and displays used to program the sampler for bottles per sam ple and samples per bottle multiplexing and sequential sampling are somewhat different The section is also extended to allow you to switch mul tiplexed bottles or bottle sets after programmed periods of time With the extended mode you can still switch bottles after a programmed number of samples have been deposited The Key Times sec tion is extended to allow you to enter the time of the first bottle or bottle set change If you have enabled the Sampling Stops and Resumes config ure option the Key Times section is extended to included displays for sampl
75. sample purge for the first sample delivered to Bottle 2 Step 23 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 2 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 2 PUMPING 200 ml The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done L Step 24 When the routine is complete this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 96 SAMPLES Step 25 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 42 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 5 demonstrates the steps needed to program the sampler for a flow paced routine that will place a sample in two bottles at each sample event Sample volumes of 500 ml are to be placed in the bottle sets at intervals of 10 flow pulses The routine is to start at 5 00 AM the following morning Example 5 Flow paced multiplexed samples per bottle sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select FLOW TIME FLOW PACED SAMPLING Enter 10 as the flow pulse interval The sampler will take a sample every tenth flow pulse received SAMPLE EVERY DIS 10 PULSES 1 9999 Select YES to multiplex samples MULTIPLEX SAMPLES Step 5 YES NO Select BOTTLES PER SAMPLE
76. sample volume into more than one bottle At each sample event a sample volume is placed in several bottles in sets of as many as 24 bottles Multiple bottle compositing combines bottles per samples multiplexing and samples per bottle multiplexing it is applicable to situations where you need a series of identical sets of samples You can also use multiple bottle com positing when you need a series of larger volume composite samples by taking several smaller sam ples and distributing them over several bottles In the extended programming mode you can switch multiplexed bottles or bottle sets after a programmed number of samples have been depos ited or after a programmed period of time Both methods can be used with either time paced or flow paced routines By specifying the number of samples to be deposited you can control the vol ume of each bottle precisely By specifying that the sets be switched after specific time periods you can control the time frame for a series of sample volumes This is especially useful for flow paced sampling Although the flow rate may vary each bottle or bottle set represents a fixed time period STORM Sampling The 3700 Series storm capa bilities are ideal for monitoring storm water runoff The sampler allows you to divide the bottles into two groups The first group of bottles is normally reserved for a first flush grab sample The second bottle group receives the flow weighted composite samples
77. samples in the first bottle set until the first switch time At the first switch time the distributor moves to the next bottle set The first bottle set may not be com pletely filled however by starting the routine early you can sample until the bottle switches are placed on schedule to avoid missing any samples If you do not enter a first switch time the sampler will begin timing the switch interval from the start time for the routine and the first bottle or bottle set will receive samples for the full time period Switch times are not available in STORM routines 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 17 Programming Mode Sample Pacing Distribution PROGRAM CONFIGURE Configure SAMPLER To Configure Sequence Sample Pacing Display 12 TIME FLOW STORM Som PACED SAMPLING To STORM branch Flow Display 11 Display 22 UNIFORM NONUNIFORM SAMPLE EVERY 1 TIME INTERVALS PULSES 1 9999 Display 21 Display 20 SAMPLE EVERY Yes MODIFY SEQUENCE IC No HOURS MINUTES YES NO Display 25 TAKE SAMPLES 1 MAX Clock Time Minutes Display 26 Display 27 TAKE SAMPLES AT QUANTITY AT INTERVAL 1 HH MM DD MM 1 AT MINUTES N7 AA A a Wa Mud pp Leo via A E RE Display eh ee ae SOS LU V CSS 13 or more Bottles Per ES Sample Event BOT LES PER
78. sampling Display 92 flow paced sampling Display 93 storm paced sampling 70 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 21 Start Time Diagram START SAMPLING Start Time Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay No Manual Samples Disable Signal Ignored Sampler enabled at start time Sampler disabled at start time TIME PACING basic programming FLOW PACING basic and extended programming UNIFORM TIME INTERVALS extended programming NONUNIFORM TIME INTERVALS IN MINUTES extended programming I1 84 9 1 94 4 ES Sample event at start time Timed sample events Always occurs Flow paced events Occurs when sampler configured for sample at start time in Flow Mode configure option Sampler enabled Sampler Disabled I 1 I gt No Manual Samples Sample event on enable Timed sample events Always occurs Flow paced events Occurs when sampler configured for sample upon enable in Enable Pin configure option I time or flow interval 71 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 22 Start Time Diagram for Nonuniform Clock Time Routines START SAMPLING Start Time Delay to Start Time Determined by first nonuniform clock time entry No Manual Samples Disable Signal Ignored Sampler enabled at 1 I I I gt
79. settings and to program the sampler for several different sampling routines The pro gramming examples in this manual present each display in the order in which they appear on the sampler They are designed to provide you with step by step procedures and are provided as mod els for you to use later when programming the sampler for your real applications Each pro gramming example concludes with the run state displays that appear while that routine is being executed You can use the run state displays to monitor the sampler s progress through a routine Examples 2 through 6 illustrate the basic pro gramming sequence Because many of the features of the extended programming mode are affected by selections made in the configure sequence exam ples for the extended programming sequence fol low the section Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure We recommend you become familiar with the basic programming mode proce dure and examples before using the extended pro gramming mode Most of the procedures used in the extended programming mode duplicate those of the basic mode and are not repeated in the extended programming procedures section Flow charts accompany examples for both pro gramming modes These charts diagram the pro gram sequence structure for each mode Figure 15 charts the Basic Programming Mode structure 30 Figures 17 18 and 19 charts the structure of the Extended Programming Mode The charts are pro
80. start time Start time is first nonuniform clock time Sample event always occurs Programmed sample events skipped while sampler disabled Sampler enabled Sampler disabled at 1 I I gt start time Sampler Disabled No Manual Samples One sample event occurs to compensate for skipped samples I time interval 72 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Storm Programming Many storm water runoff monitoring permits require a first flush grab sample within the first 30 minutes of the storm event and a time or flow paced composite sample during the remainder of the event The 3700 Sampler s STORM pacing is ideal for monitoring storm events Storm pacing allows you to e Divide the sampler s bottles into two groups The first bottle group receives the first flush grab sample The grab sample is always a time paced sample The second bottle group receives either a flow paced or time paced sample Collect samples for the second bottle group after collecting the first flush samples or col lect samples for both groups at the same time See Figures 23 and 24 Distribute sample volumes to both bottle groups sequentially or in any of the three mul tiplexing schemes bottles per sample sam ples per bottle or multiple bottle compositing Use an Isco 3200 or 4200 Series Flow Meter or a 4100 Series F
81. suction line is in place PRESS MANUAL SAMPLE Display 81 KEY WHEN READY This display is part of the calibration sequence When it first appears it reports the programmed sample vol ume If the measured volume differs from the reported volume enter the measured volume here ml VOLUME Display 82 DELIVERED This display is part of the calibration sequence and appears if the measured volume and the programmed vol ume differ by a factor of two or more Select YES to confirm the number entered in Display 82 Select NO to return to Display 82 ml ARE YOU Display 83 SURE YES NO Select YES to enter a start time NO will begin the sampling routine according to the delay set in Display 310 ENTER START TIME Display 90 YES NO This display appears when you have selected YES in Display 90 Enter the start time and date for the first sample event This display will also appear if you have initiated the routine after a programmed start time so that you can reprogram the start time TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT Display 91 HH MM DD MMM This display appears when you have selected YES in Display 90 Enter the start time and date for the flow pulse countdown This display will also appear if you have initiated the routine after a programmed start time so that you can reprogram the start time START FLOW COUNT AT Display
82. the ends of the cables with the small loops at the center of the top cover Then feed the padlock through the loops and lock as shown in Figure 8 14 Figure 7 Locking the sampler 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 3 Safety Procedures Important Information When installing the Isco 3700 Compact or Stan dard Sampler the safety of the personnel involved should be the foremost consideration No project is so important or deadline so critical as to justify the risk of human life The following two sections present both general and specific safety procedures for working in and around manholes and sewers Warning The 3700 samplers have not been approved for use in hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code Caution Before you install any sampler you must take the proper safety precautions The following discus sion of safety procedures offers only general guidelines Each situation in which you install a sampler varies You must take into account the in dividual circumstances of each installation Additional safety considerations other than those discussed here may be required Check applica ble guidelines codes and regulations of federal state city and county agencies General Safety Procedures The following procedures are those used by Black amp Veatch a respected consulting firm We have reprinted them here with their kind permission Field personnel must keep safety u
83. the most recently entered digit It is also used to step through display status information and configure option list 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler e Right Arrow Use the right arrow key to select 1 of 2 or more program options in an input display You can also press it to step through display status information and config ure option list Displays There are two types of displays displays that com municate information about the sampler s status and displays that request input In many cases you must respond to a display with the keypad Informational Displays Informational dis plays communicate information about the sam pler s status For example when the sampler completes a sampling program a display similar to the illustration below appears It communicates the sampler s status DONE the number of sam ples taken which will vary according to the pro gram and the current time and date DONE 48 SAMPLES 10 32 34 14 JUN 91 Input Displays You can easily identify input dis plays because they contain a blinking word or number The blinking word or number serves as a prompt for input and is said to be selected When the input displays shown below first appear the word PROGRAM display a and the sample vol ume entry 250 display 5 will be blinking Italic characters are used to represent blinking words or numbers in illustrations in this manual
84. the side of the control box is used to connect to an external 12 V source A 3 75 Amp PTC device provides circuit protection The 3700 Sampler contains two printed circuit boards the main board and the pump control board The display module attached to the main circuit board also contains a small circuit board This mod ule is fully assembled when purchased It does not contain any user serviceable parts Unless the dis play module is being replaced do not disturb it Main Board P4 supplies power to the circuitry pin 1 is ground and pin 2 is 12 volts A 5 volt switching regulator IC U11 obtains a 5 volt rail from the 12 volt supply All of the ICs used in the 3700 Samplers are pow ered from the 5 volt rail IC U11 is also used as a low voltage detector constantly monitoring the 12 volt supply IC U17 A voltage converter provides a 5 volt supply which some components require IC U8 is the microprocessor IC U5 is the ROM and IC U7 is the RAM These three ICs make up the brains of the 3700 Sampler The microprocessor executes the program stored in ROM While executing informa tion program settings sample data etc is retrieved from and stored in RAM A 4 608 MHz crystal oscillator Y1 sets the microprocessor s execution speed The 3700 Sampler keeps track of time with a real time clock IC U3 Both the RAM and IC U3 are battery backed with a lithium battery B1 IC U1 is a switch that selects between batter
85. to Isco and Isco will pay surface transportation to return the repaired instrument to the customer Isco will not pay air freight or customer s packing and crating charges The warranty for any instrument is the one in effect on date of shipment Warranty period begins on the shipping date unless Isco agrees in writing to a different date Excluded from this warranty are normal wear expendable items such as charts ribbon tubing and glassware and damage due to corrosion misuse accident or lack of proper maintenance This warranty does not cover Isco on line Process Analyzers and certain Isco SFE instruments which are covered under different warranty terms nor does it cover products not sold under the Isco trademark or for which any other warranty is specifically stated in sales literature This warranty is expressly in lieu of all other warranties and obligations and Isco specifically disclaims any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Any changes in this warranty must be in writing and signed by a corporate officer The warrantor is Isco Inc 4700 Superior Lincoln NE 68504 U S A This warranty applies to USA customers Customers in other countries should contact their Isco dealer for warranty service Before returning any instrument for repair please call fax or e mail the Isco service department for instructions Many problems can often be diagnosed and corrected over the phone
86. to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 9 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Step 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER Step through the program until the CALIBRATE SAMPLER input display appears Step 5 TIME FLOW Stepa PACED SAMPLING Other program sequence displays Step 4 i Select YES CALIBRATE SAMPLER LYES NO Before pressing the MANUAL SAMPLE key make sure a collection container is underneath the distributor PRESS MANUAL SAMPLE Step 6 KEY WHEN READY The sampler will deliver the programmed sample volume MANUAL SAMPLE PUMPING 200 ml Step 7 and enter that value here 200 ml VOLUME DELIVERED Measure the actual volume delivered Step 8 Repeat the procedure if desired by selecting YES When you are satisfied with the calibration select NO Under normal conditions you should not need to repeat the procedure Step 9 CALIBRATE SAMPLER n YES NO Other program sequence displays Step 10 The sampler returns to standby Press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY 9 39 50 19 JUN 91 Step 11 49 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Configure Sequence The configure sequence provides a number of setup options Some options enable sampling features some provide reference d
87. vided to act as a map to the programming pro cess Both charts are divided into sections Sample Pacing Sample Distribution Sample Vol ume and Key Times which correspond to the steps listed in the procedure discussed below Each chart contains the input displays used in the sequence The input displays on each chart are labeled with their display number so they can be cross referenced with the listing found in Appen dix C As noted earlier Isco ships the sampler with a test program and factory configuration settings The examples in this manual assume that you are using all factory settings and that the sampler will use the 24 bottle base and a 10 foot length of 9 s inch vinyl suction line The settings shipped with your 37700 include the size of bottle ordered and the size type and length of suction line When you check the configuration settings be sure the set tings match your equipment not the example Most program and configure settings can be reini tialized to factory settings if desired Table 7 lists the factory settings The Run Diagnostics section discusses the reinitialize option Basic Programming Procedure The steps for programming the sampler in basic mode follow the procedure outlined below 1 Turn on the sampler with the ON OFF key The sampler always wakes up in the standby state The STANDBY message will appear If the sampler is turned off while running a routine the PROGRAM
88. water rinse no detergent Acid wash with at least 20 hydrochloric acid Dishwasher cycle tap and distilled water rinse cycles no detergent 3 4 5 Suction Line 1 4 or s Vinyl 1 Replace in covered Isco bases Do not reuse sample tubing No cleaning required Use new sample tubing for each new sampling setup Use Teflon tubing where samples for organics are to be collected Isco Pump Tube 1 Rinse by pumping hot tap water through tubing for at least 2 minutes 2 Acid wash tubing by pumping at least a 20 solution of hydrochloric acid through tubing for at least 2 minutes Rinse by pumping hot tap water through tubing for at least 2 minutes Rinse by pumping distilled water through tub ing for at least 2 minutes Teflon Tubing 1 Rinse twice with spectro grade acetone 2 Rinse thoroughly with hot tap water using a brush if possible to remove particulate matter and surface film 3 Rinse thoroughly three times with tap water 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 4 Acid wash with at least 20 percent hydrochloric acid 5 Rinse thoroughly three times with tap water 6 Rinse thoroughly three times with distilled water 7 Rinse thoroughly with petroleum ether and dry by pulling room air through tubing 8 Dry overnight in warm oven less than 150 F if possible 9 Cap ends with aluminum foil Replacement of Pump Tubing The pump tube serves two functions it is a
89. which is a durable lightweight alternative to a laptop 3700 Standard Description The 3700 Standard is designed for operation in hos tile environments such as sanitary sewers without additional protection The gray acrylonitrile butadi ene styrene ABS plastic used in the basic construc tion of the exterior exhibits good resistance to aqueous solutions containing common acids and bases All of the other external components are made of either stainless steel anodized aluminum polypropylene Noryl or EPDM 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The 3700 Standard consists of three units the top cover the center section and the base section The removable cover protects the control box mounted on the center section The center section includes the control box liquid detector pump and distri bution system A desiccator is installed in the control box to pre vent moisture damage to the electronics pump and distributor systems The sample base holds the sequential or composite bottles and is fully insulated allowing you to ice down samples to maintain sample integrity A watertight control box mounted on the top of the center section houses the controller The controller consists of a microprocessor with software embed ded in a PROM Programmable Read Only Mem ory and supporting electronics The controller runs the pump moves the distributor responds to the keypad and presents information on the dis play The co
90. you can obtain more representative samples with out the strainer If you don t use the strainer you can attach a short piece of thin walled aluminum tubing to the end of the suction line and anchor the tubing in the flow stream so that the inlet is ori ented upstream The thin wall will provide mini mum disturbance of the flow stream and aluminum ions are usually not of concern in analysis The pre sample purge cycle should be sufficient to remove any debris that may collect over the strainer or tub ing entrance between sampling events Intake Placement The proper placement of the sampler intake assures the collection of represen tative samples Place the intake in the main flow not in an eddy or at the edge of flow The vertical position of the intake in the flow is important An intake at the bottom may result in excess heavy solids and no floating materials while placement at the top may result in the opposite The suction line tends to float in deep flow streams dislodging the line and strainer The chart below shows the maximum depths you can submerge the lines and strainers without risks of floatation At depths exceeding the safe depths anchor the line and strainer securely Strainer la Vinyl 3e Vinyl 3 8 Teflon Line Line Line StainlessSteel 22 feet 15 feet Low Flow StainlessSteg 14 feet T feet Polypropylene 22 feet 11 feet CPVC __ 4 feet 12 Attachin
91. 2 and 8 bottle options are available only if you have a refrigerated base See the instruction man ual for the 3720 sampler for more information If you have a 3700 Compact 1 12 and 24 bottles are the only valid choices as the 4 bottle option is not available SAMPLE CONTINUOUSLY YES NO Display 48 The 3700 Standard can be programmed for contin uous sampling which means that they will sample into successive sets of bottles until the last set of bottles has been sampled into and then return to the first set of bottles and continue sampling indef initely into successive sets Continuous sampling is available for all multiple bottle configurations Note The sampler will deposit samples indefinitely even though the bottles have been filled to capacity To avoid overfilling the bottles replace them at regular time intervals or as soon as they are filled Bottle Volume The sampler will accept bottle volumes between 100 ml and 30 000 ml It uses the bottle volume to calculate the range of acceptable sample volumes in the sample volume input dis play and to check for probable overfill when run ning a sampling routine Table 5 lists Isco s standard bottle sizes for com posite samplers When using the standard bottles enter the bottle volume setting listed in the third column of the table We have adjusted the recom mended bottle sizes downward Using the lower adjusted volume helps prevent over
92. 3700 Portable Samplers Instruction Manual Part 60 3703 267 of Ass rund 3704 101 Copyright 2001 All rights reserved Isco Inc evision H F g 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler FOREWORD This instruction manual is designed to help you gain a thorough understanding of the operation of the equipment Isco recommends that you read this manual com pletely before placing the equipment in service Although Isco designs reliability into all equipment there is always the possibility of a malfunction This manual may help in diagnosing and repairing the malfunc tion If the problem persists call or email the Isco Customer Service Department for assistance Contact information is provided below Simple difficulties can often be diagnosed over the phone If it is necessary to return the equipment to the factory for service please follow the shipping instructions provided by the Customer Ser vice Department including the use of the Return Authorization Number speci fied Be sure to include a note describing the malfunction This will aid in the prompt repair and return of the equipment Isco welcomes suggestions that would improve the information presented in this manual or enhance the operation of the equipment itself Contact Information Phone 800 228 4373 USA Canada Mexico 402 464 0231 Outside North America Fax 402 465 3022 Email address Info isco com Website ww
93. 42 HOURS MINUTES 152 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears if you select TIME in Display 41 Enter the amount of time each bottle set receives samples CHANGE SETS EVERY Display 48 HOURS MINUTES This display appears after you select SAMPLES in Display 40 Enter the number of samples each bottle receives CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY Display 44 SAMPLES This display appears after you select SAMPLES BTL in Display 41 Enter the number of samples each bot tle set is to receive CHANGE SETS EVERY Display 45 SAMPLES This display appears when you select yes in Display 95 Enter the time of the first bottle switch The remaining bottle changes will occur according to settings entered in Display 42 The display will also appear if you have started the routine after the programmed switch time FIRST BOTTLE CHANGE Display 46 AT HH MM MM DD This display appears when you select YES in Display 95 Enter the time of the first bottle set switch The remaining bottle set changes will occur according to settings entered in Display 43 The display will also appear if you start the routine after the programmed switch time FIRST SET CHANGE AT Display 47 HH MM MM DD This display appears when the sampler is configured for 2 4 8 12 or 24 bottle configurations under uni form time fl
94. 92 HH MM DD MM This display is the last display of the storm branch It appears when you select YES in Display 90 Enter the start time for the storm sampling routine The sampler will disregard enable or disable signals from the flow meter until the start time you enter here STORM ENABLED AFTER Display 93 HH MM DD MM This display appears when you have selected TIME in either Display 40 or 41 Select YES if you want to specify a clock time for the first bottle or bottle set switch Select NO if you want to begin the switch interval at the routine s start time ENTER FIRST SWITCH Display 95 TIME YES NO This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Enter the number of stop and resume times STOP or RESUME Display 100 TIMES 0 24 This display appears when the setting in Display 100 is greater than zero Enter the appropriate stop time STOP SAMPLING AT Display 101 1 HH MMDD MMM 154 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears when the setting in Display 100 is greater than one It follows Display 101 Enter the appropriate resume time RESUME SAMPLING AT Display 102 1 HH MMDD MMM This display follows Display 22 Enter the maximum amount of time you want between flow paced sample events in a storm program If the time between flow pulses exceeds this entry the sampler will ter
95. A Reactivity Is stable under normal temperatures and pressures in sealed containers Hazardous polymerization will not occur SECTION VII SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES Notify safety personnel of spills or leaks Clean up personnel need protection against inhalation of dusts or fumes Eye protection is required Vacuuming and or wet methods of cleanup are preferred Place in appropriate containers for disposal keeping airborne particulates at a minimum Clay is slippery when wet Disposal Consult applicable local state and federal regulations to select the method of disposal Recover metal components by reprocessing whenever possible Updated April 4 1994 Page 3 174 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET DESI PAK Packaged Desiccant SECTION VIII SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Respiratory Protection Provide a NIOSH MSHA jointly approved respirator in the absence of proper environmental control Contact your safety equipment supplier for proper mask type Ventilation Provide general and or local exhaust ventilation to keep exposures below the TLV Ventilation used must be designed to prevent spots of dust accumulation or recycling of dusts Protective Clothing Wear protective clothing including long sleeves and gloves to prevent repeated or prolonged skin contact Eye Protection Chemical splash goggles designed in compliance with OSHA regulations are recommended Consult you
96. A approved respirator is recommended if dust is generated VENTILATION General local exhaust ventilation as necessary to control any air contaminants to within their PELs or TLVs during the use of this product PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT Safety glasses with side shields PERSONNEL SAMPLING PROCEDURE For CRYSTALLINE SILICA Refer to NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods 39 Edition Volume 2 Methods 7500 7601 and 7602 SECTION IX PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES Boiling Point Not Applicable Specific Gravity H 0 1 2 0 Melting Point Not Applicable Vapor Pressure mm Hg Not Applicable Vapor Density Air 1 Not Applicable Evap Solubility In Water Negli Appearance Grey to off white granules Odor Odorless pH Not Determined SECTION X STABILITY AND REACTIVITY Stability Generally considered stable Avoid None expected 167 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 6 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 INCOMPATIBILITY Materials to Avoid None expected HAZARDOUS DECOMPOSITION OR BY PRODUCTS None expected Polymerization Polymerization is not expected to occur Avoid Not applicable SECTION XI TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION CHEMICAL NAME Wt LDSO LCSO SILICA CRYSTALLINE QUARTZ CAS NO 14808 60 7 1 3 Not Available Not Available ALUMINUM SILICATE CAS NO 12141 46 7 97 Not Available Not Available NOTE See Sections III VIII and XII for additional information
97. Cleaning Protocols for Priority Pollutants 115 Replacement of Pump Tubing 116 Removing the Pump Tubing 116 Installing a New Pump Tube 119 Replacement of Suction Line 119 Vinyl Suction 0 0 0 0 eee eee 119 Teflon Suction Line 120 Changing the Internal Desiccant 120 Chapter 7 Servicing 122 Introduction 122 Servicing the 122 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Removal of the Control Access to Electronic Components Removal of the Distributor Gear Case Assembly 125 Removal of the Pump Gear Case Assembly 125 Precautions for Servicing CMOS Circuitry 125 Preliminary Electronics Troubleshooting Steps 127 Circuit Boards 127 Sample Event Cycle and Delivery of Sample Volumes ue eme ee ERES 132 Replacement Parts 148 132 Accessory Parts 148 132 Accessories List for 3700 Portable Samplers 148 General Accessories 148 Bottles Caps and Retaining Rings 148 Suction Lines and Strainers 148 Power 149 Interfacing Equipment 149 List of Figures 1 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Standa
98. Displays event Samplers programmed with nonuniform clock times may skip a number of samples if dis abled for long periods If the sampler is disabled and subsequently enabled it will initiate only one event to compensate for the skipped sample events even if several sample event times have been passed Note Nonuniform clock time programming is designed to replace flow pacing when a flow meter is not available at the site Before using a sampler programmed for nonuniform clock times with a flow meter be sure flow pacing is not a more appro priate application Manual sample key and programmed start times The sampler will disregard the manual sample key during the delay to start time and dur ing the disable period The periods where the sam pler disregards disable signals Delay to Start and the manual sample key when disabled appear in Figures 21 and 22 Start Time Delay Entries made in the Start Time Delay configure option affect the start times The Start Time Delay section discusses this config ure option Programmed Start Time displays Program Sequence Start Time Delay display Configure Sequence MINUTE DELAY TO START 0 9999 Display 310 Start Time Delay configure option ENTER START TIME YES NO Display 90 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT Display 491 HH MM DD MMM START FLOW COUNT AT HH MM DD MMM STORM ENABLED AFTER HH MM DD MMM time paced
99. E YES NO After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state Step 10 When the sampler is installed press Step 11 PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here Step 12 This display appears after you press the start sampling key to start the time on the first line The second line reports the current time and date Step 13 START SAMPLING AT BOTTLE 1 1 23 routine It reports the scheduled start START FLOW COUNT AT 10 37 23 20 06 JUN When the scheduled start time arrives the sampler will begin to count flow pulses This display indicates the bottles which will receive sample volumes at the upcoming sample event If the bottle set consisted of four bottles the first line of the display would read BOTTLES 1 4 The number of flow pulses remaining to the sample event is displayed on the second line Step 14 BOTTLES 1 2 AFTER 10 PULSES The second line of the display changes as each flow pulse is received Step 15 Step 16 This display shows one pulse remaining until the sample event Step 17 BOTTLES 1 2
100. EPER Y NUMBER 45 5 24 ES 2 m Sio ws y R30 WEIGHT Eon 1K 7 T 5 1K TABLE 538 680 2 a 6 4 ve 522 5 1 2N3704 i dos ue E Y TLD 5 6 9 1 s g g KEY 4 x o T 5 gt gt RST 6 3 onie 100 1K 10K z our s Hota aem 828 XN 2 Pi 2 BL g 378 war s 1N5618 12 ZNA o gt gt RST GND g POWER R58 5 54K E 1 PS GND MASTER PS GND SLAVE GND GND sxe E m 2 2N3704 EAS RST gt gt ast ar x SAMPLER 00 gt gt DAT T5 amp L ese 2N6290 1025 gt gt wo 5 13 uig Q4 1K 45 5 O n ch Gs Ao DIST MTR do DIST MTR do t Voc Pao RI ROW1 RA H 1 gt er 1 pat Re ROW2 1UFB gt Qo ROWS 10K GND koe veal EXER KEYBOARD 9 MR WR pas Lm sof i a m pas Lo lt lt Rs ROWS Y m DISTRB do m gt pas 22 lt lt ROWS 7 255 1 0 gt 37 GND ADJ 2 DIST MTR PAT GND CR2 Ute CR3 R35 Ui uis 3 BTL LED 35 18 4 1 2 3 an 10 RsT gt gt RST 280 H vor Di o Di T 5 4 XTR voros gt gt cs rm 9 x us 22K dnd amd s ensw Pee 2588 5 LMF60 E 531 KEY us 2 gt Fl 5 xo 5 4 7 BTL PB 3 338 2 40106 R51 5 8 GND PBs ND P6 34 24 1 2 gt 8 a 470 8 Do Do voz ho GND ute 25 g
101. Fast Transient Level 2 1kV on ac lines B CISPR1 1 RF Emissions Group 1 Class A Industrial Scientific EN 55011 and Medical Equipment We the undersigned hereby declare that the design of the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive s and Standards as of April 25 1996 Bill Foster Michael Teutscher USA Representative European Authorized Representative isco isco Bill Foster Contact Dr Dirk K6ppenkastrop Engineering Gesch ftsf hrer Managing Director 4700 Superior Street Lincoln Nebraska 68504 Phone 402 464 0231 Fax 402 464 4543 60 3703 246 Rev B STIP ISCO GmbH SiemensstraBe 2 64823 Grof3 Umstadt Telefon 06078 7 86 82 Telefax 06078 7 86 88 One Year Limited Warranty Factory Service Isco instruments covered by this warranty have a one year limited warranty covering parts and labor Any instrument that fails during the warranty period due to faulty parts or workmanship will be repaired at the factory at no charge to the customer Isco s exclusive liability is limited to repair or replacement of defective instruments Isco is not liable for consequential damages Isco will pay surface transportation charges both ways within the 48 contiguous United States if the instrument proves to be defective within 30 days of shipment Throughout the remainder of the warranty period the customer will pay to return the instrument
102. HALTED message will be dis played Both messages indicate the sampler is in standby 2 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the interactive state Select program Refer to Fig ure 15 for displays noted in Steps 3 to 6 To return to a previous display when program ming the sampler press the exit program key The sampler will return to standby Press the ENTER PROGRAM key again to reenter the inter active state Continue to press the ENTER PRO GRAM key to scroll through the displays until you locate the display in question 3 Enter the Sample Pacing settings The sampler will prompt you to select either time or flow pacing Depending on your selection you will then be prompted to enter the time or flow pulse interval between samples 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 15 Basic Programming Mode Program Sequence Structure STANDBY 9 50 34 12 91 Display 1 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER Configure Sample Pacing Display 10 TIME FLOW PACED SAMPLING Display 21 Display 22 SAMPLE EVERY SAMPLE EVERY HOURS MINUTES PULSES 1 9999 v Y Sample Distribution Display 35 MULTIPLEX SAMPLES YES NO Co Display 36 Bottles Per Sample BOTTLES PER SAMPLE Samples Per Bottle SAMPLES PER BOTTLE Display 30 Displ
103. ING key to run the program STANDBY Step 9 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle press the ENTER PROGRAM key To start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here START SAMPLING Step 10 AT BOTTLE 1 1 24 The first line of this display indicates the start time The second line reports the current time and date START AT 10 38 19 JUN Step 11 10 37 26 19 JUN This display indicates the bottle that will receive a sample at the next sample event The second line indicates the number of pulses remaining in the sample BOTTLE 1 Step 12 AFTER 5 PULSES This display shows that one flow pulse has been received The pulse countdown continues until the sample event concludes BOTTLE 1 Step 13 AFTER 4PULSES Step 14 The second line of the display will disappear as the sampler begins the pre sample purge Step 15 BOTTLE 1 This display appears when the pump begins to run in the forward direction to deliver the sample volume It remains through the end of the post sample purge BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 500 ml When the first sample volume has been delivered the display indicates the next sample bottle and the number of pulses remaining until the next sample event This series of displays will repeat until the last sample is taken at bottle 24 and the sampling routine is done BOTT
104. ION DISPLAY NO FACTORY SETTING SET CLOCK 210 Not Reset BOTTLES AND SIZE 220 221 222 223 Not Reset SUCTION LINE 230 231 232 Not Reset LIQUID DETECTOR liquid detector 240 ENABLE rinses 241 0 enter head manually 242 NO of retries 243 0 PROGRAMMING MODE 250 BASIC LOAD STORED PROGRAM 255 SAVE CURRENT PROGRAM 260 FLOW MODE SAMPLING sample at start time 270 NO sample at switch times 271 NO NONUNIFORM TIME 280 MINUTES CALIBRATE SAMPLER 290 DISABLE SAMPLING STOP RESUME 300 DISABLE sample at stop times 301 NO sample at resume times 302 NO START TIME DELAY 310 2 ENABLE PIN master slave 320 DISABLE sample upon disable 321 NO sample upon enable 322 NO reset sample interval 323 NO inhibit countdown 324 NO EVENT MARK continuous pulse 330 CONTINUOUS SIGNAL pump cycle fwd only 331 FWD PUMPING ONLY purge fwd pumping 332 FWD PUMPING PURGE COUNTS pre sample counts 340 150 post sample counts 341 BASED ON LINE LENGTH TUBING LIFE reset pump counter 351 NO pump counts 352 Not reset PROGRAM LOCK 360 DISABLE SAMPLER ID 365 Not reset RUN DIAGNOSTICS 62 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 8 Factory Program settings PROGRAM SETTING DISPLAY NO FACTORY SETTING TIME FLOW PACED SAMPLING 19 TIME UNIFORM NONUNIFORM TIME INTERVALS UNIFORM TIME FLOW STORM PACED SAMPLING 12 TIME TIME FLOW BOTTLE GROUP P FLOW MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST TIMED SAMP
105. If the routine was finished at the time you pressed the display status key the last display will report the time and date the routine ended Print Select PRINT from Display 148 to send the current status program settings or sampling results to the Isco Field Printer For information on the reports produced by the Field Printer refer to the Field Printer Instruction Manual When you select PRINT Display 149 appears Use this display to select the settings or results report The sampler will interrupt the reports to take a sample if necessary Select NO to return to standby PRINT PROGRAM NO SETTINGS RESULTS Display 5 The sampler will display one of two messages as it sends the data to the printer The first message informs you that the transmission is in progress The second message is a warning informing you that the sampler is unable to detect the printer If you see the warning message check the cable con nections between the printer and the sampler PRINTING PROGRAM INFORMATION PRINT ABORTED NO PRINTER DETECTED 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 21 Reviewing the sampling results Press display status to view the results of the sampling program Step 1 Select REVIEW Step 2 Select RESULTS Step 3 DONE 24 SAMPLES 12 34 50 20 91 REVIEW PRINT PROGRAM INFORMATION RE
106. LE 15 0 MINUTES DURING AFTER TIME MODE 3p DURING MINUTE DELAY TO Y Bd SECOND GROUP SAMPLES SAMPLE EVERY OORS au E 21 1 HOUR 0 MINUTES SAMPLE EVERY PULSES 1 9999 22 TAKE TIMED a SAMPLE EVENTS 1 SAMPLE INTERVALS OF m MINUTES 1 99 TAKE SAMPLES MA 25 10 QUANTITY AT INTERVAL E AT RENTES 27 1 AT 60 MINUTES BOTTLES PER P SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 SAMPLES 1 MULTIPLEX SAMPLES YES NO m NO BOTTLES SAMPLE SAMPLESIPER EO TEE 36 SAMPLES PER BOTTLE CHANGE BOTTLES BASED ON TIME SAMPLE 0 COUNT CHANGE SETS BASED ON TIME SAMPLE x COUNT 63 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler PROGRAM SETTING DISPLAY NO FACTORY SETTING CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY Con ull 42 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES CHANGE SETS AFTER SURES MINUTES 43 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES CHANGE BOTTLES AFTER m SAMPLES CHANGE SETS AFTER SAMPLES SAMPLE CONTINUOUSLY YES NO NO SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml EACH 10 MAX ee COMPOSITE SAMPLES 0 MAX 99 P SUCTION HEAD OF FEET 1 MAX 0 19 ENTER START TIME YES NO 9 NO STORM ENABLED AFTER a HH MM MM DD ENTER FIRST SWITCH TIME YES NO 95 NO STOP or RESUME TIMES 0 24 100 9 MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF SOURS 110 2 HOURS 0 MINUTES Extended Programming Mode All sampling capabilities available in the basic pro gramming mode are available in the extended
107. LE 2 Step 16 AFTER 5 PULSES 39 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Step 17 This display informs you that the sampling routine is completed The number of sample events displays in the upper right corner The second line indicates the current time and date DONE 24 SAMPLES Step 18 22 48 32 20 91 Example 4 shows samples per bottle multiplexed sampling Samples are taken every 15 minutes Each bottle receives four sample volumes of 200 ml each so that bottles are switched every hour The sampling routine is to start at 6 00 AM on the following day Example 4 Time paced multiplexed samples per bottle sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select TIME TIME FLOW Step 3 PACED SAMPLING Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry SAMPLE EVERY Step 4 0 HOURS 1 MINUTES Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 SAMPLE EVERY Step 5 0 HOURS 15 MINUTES Select YES to set up the samples per bottle multiplexing MULTIPLEX SAMPLES pepe LYES NO Select SAMPLES PER BOTTLE BOTTLES PER SAMPLE Step 7 SAMPLES PER BO
108. ORPORATION CHEMICAL CATALYSTS GROUP Address 600 E MCDOWELL ROAD City St Zip JACKSON MS 39204 Phone 1 800 458 8650 OR 1 800 654 4039 FOR CHEMICAL EMERGENCY CALL CHEMTREC 24 HOURS 1 800 424 9300 US Canada Puerto Rico Virgin Islands 1 202 483 7616 Outside Above Area SECTION II COMPOSITION INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS INGREDIENT CAS NO Wt SILICA CRYSTALLINE QUARTZ 14808 60 7 1 3 ALUMINUM SILICATE 12141 46 7 97 INGREDIENT NOTES NOTE Industrial hygiene sampling in our plant has shown the respirable fraction of crystalline silica quartz to be only 0 1 0 115 NOTE See Section VIII for Exposure Limits and Section XI for Toxicological Information 163 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 2 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 SECTION III HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION EMERGENCY OVERVIEW Grey to off white granules Odorless Flash Point Not Applicable SUSPECT CANCER HAZARD Risk of cancer depends on route duration and level of exposure Prolonged or repeated inhalation may cause lung damage May cause eye and respiratory tract irritation Not a fire or explosion hazard ROUTES OF ENTRY Eyes NO Skin NO Inhalation YES Ingestion NO POTENTIAL HEALTH EFFECTS EYE CONTACT may cause mechanical irritation if exposed to large amounts of dust SKIN CONTACT may cause irritation due to mechanical abrasion INHALATION causes irritation of the respiratory tr
109. OTTLE GROUP Gime Display 17 Display 16 __ MINUTE DELAY TO DURING AFTER SECOND GROUP SAMPLES FIRST GROUP Display 24 Display 22 SAMPLE INTERVAL OF SAMPLE EVERY __ MINUTE 1 9999 PULSES 1 9999 Display 110 MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF HOURS MINUTES WY Display 30 BOTTLES PER Display 70 SAMPLE EVENT 1 MAX 1 ji STORM Key Times SUCTION HEAD OF i _ 31 FEET 1 1 SAMPLES PER wi BOTTLE 1 Display 80 1 CALIBRATE SAMPLE display 50 VOLUME YES SAMPLE VOLUMES OF __ ml EACH 10 MAX Display 90 ENTERISTARTETIME O E ee Dem pe eS YES Display 93 STORM ENABLED AFTER HH MM DD MMM BONA ER DAMES Xz PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE COMPLETE 68 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Stops and Resumes The Stops and Resumes settings are available only when you have enabled the Sampling Stop Resume configure option You must first enter the number of stops and resumes from 0 to 24 Enter 0 if you want to omit the stop and resume settings without returning to the con figure sequence and disabling the Stops and Resumes option Then enter the stop and resume clock times The first entry will be a stop time Refer to the Key Times section of Figure 18 Dis play s 100 101 and 102 Determining the N
110. PLACEMENT PARTS LIST 603703268 SHEET 8 OF 8 Tne REV D DATE 02015 T PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 59 693103282 G TRI 60 603703032 CONTROL PANEL 64 603108003 ROL PANEL STUD ASSEMBLY 66 693 04003 G ASSEMBLY KEYPAD 68 603104189 UIT BOARD ASS EMBL 3700 CPU CE 69 603703028 DOFF 1 4 HEX SST 6 32M F X 781 10 693103008 ROS TATIC DISCHARGE SHIELD 602103010 CONTROL BOX GASKET T2 209902138 TENSION CLIP 3 8 DIA 13 490001300 HUMIDITY INDICATOR CARD 14 603103256 STRAP INTERCONNECT 5 5 15 231514510 EW SST 8 32 X 5 8 NOTE 147 For current prices and quotations on parts contact Isco Service Department This list is subject to change without notice 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix B Accessories Accessories List for 3700 Portable Samplers General Accessories Extra Silastic pump tubing 42 length 24 bottle and 12 bottle base 60 3704 026 Extra Silastic pump tubing 39 5 length 4 bottle base 60 3714 019 Carrying cover for extra base sequential bottles 60 3704 036 Snap on suspension 60 1394 014 Sampler locking
111. PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER a SAMPLES VOLUMES OF 250 ml 10 1000 b Display Numbers Nearly all input displays have a number assigned to them The number is used to cross reference the input displays with a explanatory listing found in Appendix C If you have a question about a given input display you can easily locate the description of the display To access the display number press the stop key when viewing the input display To see the display number press the stop key read the number from the display then look up the corresponding num ber in Appendix C Displays With Choices There are two types of input displays displays that prompt you to make a choice between time paced and flow paced sam 29 pling for example and displays that prompt for numeric input sample volume for example In displays that ask you to make a choice you must select one of as many as four alternatives placed in brackets Display a prompts you to select the pro gram or configure sequence The choices PRO GRAM and CONFIGURE appear in brackets When the display illustrated in a appears the word PROGRAM will be blinking If PRO GRAM is acceptable press the enter program key If PROGRAM is not acceptable press the left arrow or right arrow key until CONFIGURE is blinking Then press the enter program key The enter program key directs the sampler to advance to the next step Numeric Input Display
112. Pacing for the Second Bottle Group Start Time _ Delay to First og First Bottle Group Second Bottle Group C AFTER Group Sample T T F N Final time paced sample Flow interval for second bottle group starts here Start Time First Bottle Group Delay to First mi 7 Group Sample _ T T 7 DURING Second Bottle Group F F F F LI is 8 a Flow interval starts here 76 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 24 Storm Sampling Time Pacing for the Second Bottle Group Start Time First Bottle Group Delay to First Group Sample _ Second Bottle Group Delay to T T T Second Group Samples Second bottle group filled during first bottle group The delay to second group sample is greater than the delay to first group sample Start Time First Bottle Group ___ Delay to First g T H T Group Sample ES Final time paced sample of first bottle group Delay to Second Group Sample gt Second Bottle Group 77 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The TIME MODE message marks the beginning of the first section This message is followed by Display 15 below MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST GROUP SAMPLE Display 15 Use this display to set amount of time between the time the sampler is enabled and the first sample delivered to the first bottle group The sampler may be e
113. R Step 7 SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Select SAMPLES CHANGE BOTTLES BASED pepe ON TIME SAMPLES Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY dg 1 SAMPLES 1 8 Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF Step 10 500 ml 10 1000 Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes 82 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Select YES ENTER START TIME Step 11 YES NO Enter the start time and date 8 00 tomorrow morning TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT Step 12 8 00 20 06 JUN After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 13 COMPLETE When the sampler is properly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 14 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here BOTTLE 1 Step 15 AT 8 00 10 38 07 This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the lef
114. R NUMBER DESCRIPTION z 9 7 T 30 60 9004 135 4 BOTTLE RACK HOLD DOWN 136 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 261 REVISION C PAGE 4 of 4 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION 137 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 62 60 3703 2 H REV 138 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 262 REVISION H SHEET 2 OF 2 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION CAP WITH FOAM UNER 00ML POLYPROPYLENE 299 0334 00 CAP WITH FOAM LINER 500ML POLYPROPYLENE 60 60 3704 111 BOTTLE HOLD DOWN CORD ASSEMBLY 6 1 1 489 0002 00 CABLE CLAMP NYLON 3 8 X 74 291 0000 00 GLASS BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP BALE 7 1 1 1 1 0 3704 186 GLASS CAP ASSEMBLY TEFLON LINED 291 0011 10 BOTTLE 375ML GLASS 60 3704 045 FLOAT AND HOUSING ASSEMBLY 60 3704 185 12 GLASS BOTTLE EXPANDER RING 291 0001 00 BLACK POLYPROPYLENE CAP WITH SOLID POLY LINER 60 9003 235 RETAINING RING 24 BOTTLE 0 3704 168 3700C TOP COVER ASSEMBLY 60 3704 170 3700C CENTER SECTION ASSEMBLY ao 2 2 2 2 2 299 0013 04 BOTTLE 2 5 GALLON WITH CAP NALGENE 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 2 139 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sam
115. Range Cheapest Safe Gravity a of Highest Common Chemical Properties t Effects Exposure Exposure Limits lower a Method of Air 21 Concentration Sources Testing Ammonia Irritant and poisonous 0 60 Causes throat and 300 85 16 25 Near top concen Sewers chemical Detectable odor at low Colorless with characteris irritation at 0 05 to trates feed rooms concentrations tic odor coughing at 0 17 500 in closed upper Short exposure at spaces 0 5 to 1 fatal Benzene Irritant colorless anes 2 77 Slight symptoms after 3 000 25 1 3 7 1 At bottom Industrial wastes var Combustible gas indi CgHg thetic several hours expo to nishes solvents cator sure at 0 16 to 5 000 0 32 2 rapidly fatal Carbon Nearly odorless when 2 64 Irritation vomiting con 15 1 3 44 0 At bottom An insecticide Combustible gas indi Bisulfide pure colorless anes vulsions psychic dis cator 2 thetic Poisonous turbances Carbon Asphyxiant Colorless 1 53 Cannot be endured at 40 000 5 000 At bottom when Products of combus Oxygen deficiency Dioxide odorless When breathed 10 for more than a to heated may stratify at tion sewer gas indicator CO2 in large quantities may few minutes even ifthe 60 000 points above bottom sludge Also issues cause acid taste Nonflam subject is at rest and from carbonaceous mable Not generally oxygen content is nor strata present in dangerous mal
116. SECTION XII ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION ECOTOXICITY No data available ENVIRONMENTAL FATE No data available SECTION XIII DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS US EPA Waste Number Not Regulated Federal state and local disposal laws and regulations will determine the proper waste disposal recycling reclamation procedures NOTE Chemical additions processing or otherwise altering this material may make the waste management information presented above incomplete inaccurate or otherwise inappropriate As local regulations may vary all waste must be disposed recycled re claimed in accordance with federal state and local environmental control regulations 168 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 7 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 SECTION XIV TRANSPORT INFORMATION INTERNATIONAL UN Number Not Regulated UNITED STATES EPA Waste Number Not Regulated DOT Classification Not Regulated CANADA PIN Number Not Regulated TDG Class Not Regulated EC DGL Not Regulated SECTION XV REGULATORY INFORMATION US FEDERAL REGULATIONS TSCA IN TSCA SARA 311 AND 312 HAZARD CATEGORIES IMMEDIATE Acute Health Hazard NO DELAYED Chronic Health Hazard YES FIRE Hazard NO REACTIVITY Hazard NO Sudden Release of PRESSURE NO SARA SECTION 313 NOTIFICATION This product does not contain toxic chemicals subject to the reporting requirements of Section 313 of Title III of the Superfund Amend
117. Sample bottles 350 ml glass without caps case of 100 68 2100 002 Caps for 350 ml glass bottles with Teflon liners case of 100 68 2100 003 1000 ml polypropylene sample bottles set of 24 with polyethylene foam lined caps 68 2100 007 350 ml glass sample bottles set of 24 with Teflon lined caps 68 2100 001 1 quart glass bottle for 12 bottle base section 291 0011 00 Lid for 1 quart glass bottle hm n 291 0011 01 Teflon liner for 1 quart glass bottle 291 0011 02 1 liter round polypropylene bottle with lid 12 bottle base section 291 0011 03 4 Bottle Rack with Hold Down 24 Bottle to 4 Bottle Conversion 60 9004 135 1 gallon polyethylene bottle with cap llle I Ih 68 2910 003 1 gallon glass bottle with llle RI eh 68 2910 004 Suction Lines and Strainers 1 4 ID x 10 vinyl suction line with weighted polypropylene bodied strainer 60 3704 067 14 ID x 25 vinyl suction line with weighted polypropylene bodied strainer 60 3704 068 38 ID x 10 vinyl suction line with weighted polypropylene bodied strainer 60 3704 071 38 ID x 25 vinyl suction line with weighted polypropylene bodied strainer 60 3704 072 38 ID x 10
118. Sampling Cycle A sample event is the complete cycle involved in taking a sample Although the cycle varies accord ing to the program settings that define the sam pling routine the cycle described here follows the typical sequence The information presented here is intended to provide you with a frame of refer ence for the remainder of this chapter 1 A sample event occurs when either the pro grammed interval has expired or programmed flow volume has passed through the stream The 3700 takes a time paced sample when an inter nal clock reaches the time selected for the sam ple For flow paced samples the 3700 takes a sample after receiving a specific of flow pulses from the flow meter Each flow pulse counts for a specific flow volume as measured by the flow meter 2 When the time interval expires or pulse count reaches a user programmed flow volume the distributor moves to the bottle that will receive the sample 3 For the pre sample purge the pump rotates in reverse The pre sample purge is an air purge of the suction line and inlet that clears the line of any accumulated debris It also purges residual liquid to avoid cross contamination of samples 4 The pump direction changes moving forward to fill the suction line up to the liquid detector 5 The sample volume measuring portion of the sampling cycle begins after liquid fills the suc tion line to the liquid detector The pump rotates forward until the programmed volu
119. TTLE Enter 4 to set the number of samples per bottle to 4 4 SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 1 50 Step 8 40 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Enter the sample volume of 200 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF Step 200 ml 10 250 Select YES so you can enter the specific start time ENTER START TIME Step 10 LYES NO When this display first appears it will show you the sampler s guess at the start time Type in the desired start time For this example the start time is 6 00 on 6 20 91 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT Step 11 6 00 20 JUN 91 After this message is displayed briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 12 COMPLETE To run the program press the START SAMPLING key after the sampler is installed STANDBY Step 13 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here START SAMPLING 7 1 24 This is used with samples per bottle multiplexing The first line tells the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number Here the upcoming sample is the first of four samples Bottle 1
120. The positions are indicated on the display If the message DISTRIBUTOR JAMMED is displayed check the routing of the pump tubing and the bot tles in the tub If the tubing and bottles are cor rectly positioned the distributor drive mechanism may need servicing Display 370 Reinitialize Controller In the final steps you reinitialize the sampler If you select NO the sampler will return to the configure option list If you select YES the sampler will reset a number of configuration and program settings then you can turn off the sampler Display 371 Table 7 lists the reinitialized settings Note Not all settings are reset Set Clock Bottle Size Suc tion Line and Sampler ID configure option set tings remain unchanged This reduces the number of settings you would need to change if the sampler were accidently reinitialized The Pump Count total is not reset to maintain an accurate count for the Tubing Life Warning Exit Configuration This option allows you to leave the configure sequence and return to the standby state There are no input displays Press the enter program key to exit the configure sequence You can exit the configuration sequence at any time using the EXIT PROGRAM key 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 7 Factory Configure Option settings CONFIGURE OPT
121. Time Extended and date of each sample You can enter dates as far as one month Intervals in advance of the current date Time Pacing Samples taken at irregular time intervals by specifying the Nonuniform Intervals in Extended amount of time in minutes between each sample You can enter Minutes intervals from 1 to 999 minutes Samples taken at regular flow intervals The sampler will totalize Flow Pacing Extended flow intervals of 1 to 9 999 pulses Distribution Sequential Basic amp Extended One sample volume placed in each bottle Samnles per Bottle More than one sample volume placed in each bottle You can p es p Basic amp Extended switch bottles after a specified number of samples have been Multiplexing deposited or after a specified time period Bottles per Sample Basic amp Extended Sample volumes placed in more than one bottle at each sample Multiplexing event Multiple Bottle More than one sample volume placed in a set of bottles You can Com Extended switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been P 8 deposited or after a specified time period Volumes and Accuracy Sample Volume Basic amp Extended You can enter volumes from 10 to 9 990 ml Suction Head Basic amp Extended You can enter suction heads from 1 to 20 feet Calibration Basic amp Extended You can calibrate sample volumes if desired Key Times You can enter specific start times for both time paced and flow Start
122. Times Basic amp Extended paced routines If you do not enter a start time Start Time Delay is used Bottles can be switched after specified time intervals After the routine starts the first switch time allows the first bottle or bottle First Switch Time Extended set to receive samples for a partial interval After the first switch the remaining sets will receive samples for full time intervals This allows you to place the sampler on schedule You can perform intermittent sampling by defining sampling stop Stop Resume Times Extended and resume times You can enter as many as 12 stop and 12 resume times Extended Samples taken at regular time intervals from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes 53 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Storm Programming Available through the Extended Mode Only Storm Pacing Mode Feature Samples taken at regular flow intervals The sampler will totalize Flow Pacing flow intervals of 1 to 9 999 pulses Storm Distribution Sequential Extended One sample volume placed in each bottle Samples per Bottle More than one sample volume placed in each bottle You can p es p Extended switch bottles after a specified number of samples have been Multiplexing deposited Bottles per Sample Sample volumes placed in more than one bottle at each sample Extended Multiplexing event Multiple Bottle More than one sample volume placed in a set of bottles You can p Ext
123. UN Indicates a sample in progress BOTTLE 1 Display 11 PUMPING 200 ml Example 24 Run State Displays Composite sampling Indicates the sample number of the next sample and the total number of samples for time paced routines The current time is shown in the lower right corner SAMPLE 1 OF 12 Display 1 AT 6 00 5 43 33 Indicates the sample number of the next sample and the total number of samples for flow paced routines SAMPLE 1 OF 12 Display 2 AFTER 10 PULSES Indicates a sample in progress BOTTLE 1 Display 3 PUMPING 200 ml 109 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 5 Options and Interfacing Equipment Introduction This chapter discusses major options available with the Isco 3700 Standard and Compact Sam plers Included is information about Conversion for composite sampling Programming and configuring the controller for composite sampling Connection to Isco and non Isco flow meters Interface devices Master Slave operation Use with the Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator Use with the Model 583 Field Computer Conversion for Composite Sampling The 3700 Standard and Compact Samplers are fully programmable for time paced and flow paced com posite sampling The object of composite sampling is to collect a series of discrete equal volume sam ples at known time or flow intervals and to place these samples in
124. VIEW PROGRAM NO SETTINGS RESULTS This display reports the start time and date of the program Press enter program to advance to the next dis play Step 4 PROGRAM STARTED AT 5 30 19 JUN 91 This display reports the nominal sample volume Press enter program to Step 5 200 ml SAMPLES advance to the next display This display reports the bottle number s for each sample event It also reports the source of the event in this case the sample was taken at the start time Press enter program to advance to the next display Step 6 SAMPLE 1 BOTTLE 1 SOURCE START This display reports the initiation time of the sample and the number of pump counts to liquid detection in the sample delivery cycle These values indicate changes in the sampling conditions head changes for example Press enter program to advance to the next display Step 7 TIME 5 30 19 JUN 91 COUNTS 280 Press enter program to continue to review the information for the remaining sample events Step 8 i Press enter program to return to the REVIEW PROGRAM display Step 9 Select NO to return to standby Step 10 Step 11 PROGRAM FINISHED AT 12 00 20 JUN 91 REVIEW PROGRAM NO SETTINGS RESULTS STANDBY 15 39 50 19 91 105 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Source of Sample Event The display illustrated i
125. a more detailed discussion of the program ming procedure see the section Basic Program ming Procedure The examples given demonstrate several types of sampling programs in the basic mode Examples of extended mode sampling pro grams are also shown 4 If desired connect the sampler to a flow meter or other interfacing equipment Start the sampler 5 As the routine is executed the displays will report the sampler s progress The programming examples in this manual conclude with the run state displays you should see for each sampling routine When the routine is done the sampler will return to standby 6 Retrieve the filled sample bottles If you wish use the Display Status procedure discussed in detail later in this chapter to examine the sam pler s log of sampling results 7 If you need to reprogram the sampler follow this procedure from the beginning If the sampler s current program is correct restart the sampling routine Using the Keypad to Respond to Displays Configuring and programming the sampler is as simple as responding to displays on the LCD with the keypad The sampler will prompt you through many of the entries by presenting a question or a 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler choice on the display You must respond with the keypad The LCD and the keypad are located on the 3700 Sampler control panel The following section Keypad Description summa rizes each key s function The section Display
126. acketed draw cords attached to the bottom of the base hold it in place Each of these draw cords is hooked to a corresponding location on the retaining ring Detach the plastic retaining ring from the base by disconnecting the draw cords from the hooks on the ring Once the ring is removed you can lift the bottles out of the base Always use the retaining rings in the 3700 Stan dard especially when using ice to cool the samples The melt water from the ice will cause the plastic bottles to float blocking the movement of the dis tributor arm Compact Sampler Bottles In the 3700 Com pact the tub is molded to the contour of the bottles including the composite bottles This eliminates the need for using the bottle inserts to position the bottles in the tub Cooling the Samples You can cool the samples by placing cubed or crushed ice in the center of the base section Users can either dump ice into the center of the base sec tion or place it in a plastic bag 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler For the most uniform cooling it is best to let the melt water from the ice run between the sample bottles creating an ice bath The quantity of ice used is dependent upon the required sample tem perature and the ambient temperature of the sam pling site The capacity of the 3700 Standard base is approximately 30 pounds of cubed ice when glass bottles are used and 10 pounds when plastic bottles are used The capacity for the 3700 C
127. act and may cause disabling progressive pulmonary fibrosis silicosis due to CRYSTALLINE SILICA QUARTZ Symptoms include cough dyspnea wheezing and impairment of pulmonary function Progression of symptoms can continue after dust exposure ceases INGESTION No adverse effects expected CARCINOGENICITY NTP YES IARC YES OSHA NO CRYSTALLINE SILICA is listed by the National Toxicology Program NTP as a confirmed animal carcinogen and by the International Agency for Research on Cancer IARC as a Group 2A sufficient evidence of carcinogenicity in laboratory animals and limited evidence in humans CHRONIC HEALTH HAZARDS Refer to Potential Health Effects and Carcinogenicity 164 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 3 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 MEDICAL CONDITIONS GENERALLY AGGRAVATED BY EXPOSURE May aggravate existing medical conditions such as respiratory ailments NOTE See Section VIII for Exposure Limits Section XI for Toxicological Information and Section XII for Ecological Information SECTION IV FIRST AID MEASURES EYE CONTACT Flush eyes with plenty of water If irritation develops call a physician SKIN CONTACT Procedures normally not needed If skin contact occurs flush with plenty of water If irritation develops call a physician INHALATION Remove to fresh air If breathing is difficult give oxygen Call a physician INGESTION Procedures normally not
128. airs can reduce the number of visits to an installation A reduced number of visits is important when considering the costs and safety of a sampling study STORM Sampling The 3700 Sampler provides a STORM variant of master slave sampling In STORM sampling the master sampler enables the slave sampler when the master sampler completes its STORM routine The slave sampler then com pletes its routine but does not enable the first sam pler at the end of the slave routine The slave s routine is normally a flow paced a routine not another STORM routine The STORM variant of 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler master slave sampling allows you to both increase the total volume of samples collected and extend the sampling time period Accurate Sample Volumes You can program the sampler to take sample volumes of 10 to 9 990 milliliters Equipped with the LD90 liquid pres ence detector the 3700s deliver accurate repeat able sample volumes in changing head conditions The LD90 is a nonwetted liquid presence detector It detects virtually any pumpable liquid and because it is nonwetted sample conductivity vis cosity temperature and composition do not affect detection Although it is not normally necessary you can calibrate samples if you wish Flexible Start Times You can program a sam pling routine to use a specific start time and date or a start time delay The sampler will accept a spe cific start time and date up to
129. al bottle base and a locating ring The 4 gallon wide mouth com posite container requires the optional composite tub Like the standard tub the composite base has double walled construction with polyurethane foam insulation 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 26 Composite Sampling Standard Bottle Tub Prepare the tub for composite sampling by install ing the sample container No locating deck is required for the composite tub locating depres sions are integrally molded into the tub You can then attach the composite base to the center sec tion Note When cooling the samples with ice the melt water may cause the bottle to float when you remove the center section Programming and Configuring the Controller for Composite Sampling After converting the sampler be sure to change the bottle number and size settings in the Bottles and Sizes configure option Refer to Event Mark and Bottle Signal Output You must reprogram the controller for composite sampling because chang ing the bottle setting will change the program sequence Refer to Programming Introduction for information on programming the controller 111 Connections to External Devices The 3700 Series Samplers can collect samples on a flow proportional basis using flow inputs from an external flow meter The 3700 requires a 5 to 15 VDC pulse of at least 25 millisecond duration to register a flow pulse Flow meters are connected to the sampler by attach
130. ample at Resume setting in the Sampling Stop Resume configure option Manual The sample event was initiated with the manual sample key and was counted as one of the programmed sample events Time Switch The sample event was initiated at the programmed switch time This event is con trolled by the Sample at Time Switch setting in the Flow Mode Sampling configure option This option is available for flow paced sampling only Disable The sample event was initiated when the sampler became disabled by a device connected to pin F of the flow meter connector generally a 3200 or 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Logger or a Liquid Level Actuator This source is also reported when the sample was taken at a programmed stop time Two different config ure option settings control this event the Sample 106 Upon Disable setting in the Enable Pin configure option and the Sample at Stop setting in the Sam pling Stop Resume configure option Error Messages and Missed Samples The probable cause of any missed sample is reported after the sample number source display A missed sample display is illustrated below SAMPLE MISSED NO LIQUID DETECTED Twelve causes are tracked and reported Pump STOP Key Hit The sampler was halted with the stop key during the sample event Pump Jammed The sampler was unable to take the sample because the pump jammed Started Too Late The sampling routine was starte
131. and 4100 Series Flow Loggers provide an internal memory module When programmed with the FLOWLINK software the flow meters store level or flow rate readings rainfall measurements and sample event data from the samplers You can retrieve the stored data which expands the information available from the sampler s results displays with a computer running FLOW LINK For more information on sampler enable control conditions and data retrieval refer to the FLOWLINK Instruction Manual provided with the FLOWLINK software Isco Field Printers and SAMPLINK for Sam pling Data Retrieval Isco provides two additional interfacing products Each of these products collect data from the sampler s memory The Isco Field Printer is a field printer designed to print sampling data from a 3700 Series Sampler You initiate the reports from either the printer or the sampler The Isco Field Printer prints two reports that reproduce the data collected by the sampler The first report lists the current status data and pro gram settings for the sampling routine The second report lists the sampling results currently stored in the sampler s memory The results include the time date and bottle numbers for each sample event and any errors encountered during the rou tine SAMPLINK and Laptop Computers The sec ond data collection product is a software package SAMPLINK which runs on a laptop computer that can be transported to the sampling install
132. ands as they enter the manhole to ensure that their hands will 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler be free to hold on or grab if they slip A good method for entering a manhole is to sit on the surface fac ing the manhole steps or ladder with the feet in the hole and the arms straddling the opening for sup port As the body slides forward and downward the feet can engage a rung and the back can rest against the opposite side of the opening If there is any doubt about the soundness of the manhole steps a portable ladder should be used A person should never enter a manhole unless he is wearing personal safety equipment including a safety harness and a hard hat Two persons should be stationed at the surface continuously while any one is working inside a manhole to lift him out if he is overcome or injured One man cannot lift an unconscious man out of a manhole The persons stationed at the surface should also function as guards to keep people and vehicles away from the manhole opening To avoid a serious injury a per son should not be lifted out of a manhole by his arm unless it is a dire emergency When more than one person must enter a man hole the first person should reach the bottom and step off the ladder before the next one starts down When two men climb at the same time the upper one can cause the lower one to fall by slipping or stepping on his fingers 5 Traffic Protection In addition to traffic c
133. ant to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number START SAMPLING Step 11 BOTTLE 1 1 24 This display appears as the sampler counts down the time remaining to the start time The first line reports the bottle which will receive the next sample volume The second line reports the start time at the left and the current time on the right BOTTLE 1 Step 12 5 44 5 42 33 When the start time arrives the sampler will take the first sample The sample event cycle begins with pre sample purge During the purge the display indicates the number of the bottle that will receive the sample volume Step 13 BOTTLE 1 As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 250 ml 37 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicates the number of the bottle that is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The left side of the second line displays the scheduled time for the next event The current time is displayed on the right side BOTTLE 2 Step 14 6 14 5 45 11 The cycle of displays shown in Steps 12 through 13 is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 15 When th
134. astic pump tubing bulk 15 1 68 1680 061 Extra Silastic pump tubing bulk 50 1 68 1680 065 Power Sources Model 913 High Capacity Power Pack 120 60 1684 088 Model 914 Battery Backed Power Pack 120 volt 0 0 ccc ce eens 60 3004 130 Model 923 High Capacity Power Pack 240 60 1684 093 Model 924 Battery Backed Power Pack 240 ccc eens 60 3004 160 Model 934 Nickel Cadmium eee ha 60 1684 040 Model 946 Lead Acid Battery 60 3004 106 Model 948 45 Amp Hour Battery ehh ha 68 3000 948 Portable 12 volt DC 6 Amp Battery Charger for 948 Battery 341 0118 12 Model 961 Battery Charger 120 volt 60 3004 059 Model 965 Five Station Battery 68 3000 965 Model 954 Solar Panel Battery 68 3000 027 Additional Solar 1 hh e 68 3000 028 Solar Panel Cable 25 foot 60 3004 097 Solar Panel Y Cable sels RARE REN dee e ee E ER 60 3004 098 Solar Panel Interr Extension
135. at four sample volumes have been deposited into each bottle The sampling rou tine will start according to the programmed start time delay set in the Start Time Delay configure option Example 11 Time paced multiplexed samples per bottle sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Sean STANDBY 5 37 23 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Step 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER Select TIME ee TIME FLOW STORM PACED SAMPLING Select UNIFORM Step 4 UNIFORM NONUNIFORM P TIME INTERVALS Enter 0 to set the hours at zero Press ENTER PROGRAM to store the number 0 and move to the minutes entry SAMPLE EVERY Step 5 0 HOURS 30 MINUTES Enter 15 to set the minutes entry to 15 SAMPLE EVERY Steps 0 HOURS 15 MINUTES Enter 1 to set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 1BOTTLES PER SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Select SAMPLES We recommend bottle set changes be based on samples for time paced sampling routines CHANGE BOTTLES BASED od ON TIME SAMPLES Enter 4 to set the number of samples per bottle to 4 CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY Step 9 4 SAMPLES 1 8 Enter 75 to set the sample volume at 75 ml M SAMPLE VOLUMES OF E Z5ml 10 250 Select NO 2 eer ENTER START TIME
136. ata and others affect run state operations Example 1 shows the procedure used to access the configure sequence When you see a SELECT OPTION lt display you are in the configure sequence Each option uses at least two displays The first display lists the option name The second and any additional displays are input displays To access an input display press the ENTER PROGRAM key while the desired option name is displayed Once you ve accessed the input display use the keypad to enter numbers and make choices Pressing the EXIT PROGRAM key in the configure option list will return the sampler to standby Press ing the EXIT PROGRAM key in a configure option input display will return you to the list of configure options without changing the display s setting By pressing the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key at the SELECT OPTION display in the configure sequence you can scroll through the list of configure options without viewing each input display If you are interested in only one or two options you can use this method to locate the option of interest quickly Each option is discussed below in the order in which it appears when configuring the sampler Individual input displays and their settings are discussed separately within the discussion of each option The name of the setting is placed at the left of each option so you can identify each topic Each discussion does not include illustrations of dis plays howev
137. ate for the second sample event The controller will guess a time at the hour succeeding the previously entered time 1 06 00 19 JUN Step 2 2 07 00 19 JUN Enter the time and date for the third sample event 2 06 30 19 JUN Step 3 3 07 00 19 JUN Continue to enter times and dates for each sample event After all sample event times have been entered the sample distribution section of the programing sequence will appear Step 4 94 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 16 shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 15 minutes starting at 6 00 AM on the following day One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle The sampling is to continue from 6 00 AM until 8 00 AM The sampling will resume again at 11 00 AM and con tinue until 1 30 PM It will pause until 4 00 PM and continue again until 6 00 PM When the sampling stops at 6 00 PM fewer than 24 samples may have been taken Note that the Sampling Stop and Resumes configure option has settings that allow you to take a sample at the stop and resume times See the section Sampling Stop Resume Example 16 Sampling with stops and resumes Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM Step 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER Select TIME
138. ated by a storm event The flow meter provides sampler enable controls triggered by a storm event After the storm event and the master slave pair have completed their routines you must service and restart the entire system Not only must you ser vice the samplers but you must reset the flow meter sampler enable control to detect another storm event You will find instructions for install 113 ing and starting a master slave pair in a storm monitoring application in the STORM Sampling Check List For information on installing and resetting a system see the Isco Storm Water Run off Monitoring Pocket Guide Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator The Liquid Level Actuator is an accessory that begins a sampling routine when the liquid level of the flow stream reaches a predetermined height The actuator inhibits sampling according to flow levels that is if the level of the flow stream falls below the actuator s probe the actuator will inhibit sampling until the level again rises to contact the probe You can set the actuator to control the sampler in two modes Latch Mode The sampler continues the sam pling routine even though the liquid level has receded and liquid no longer contacts the sen sor Toggle Mode The sampler will halt the routine when the liquid ceases to contact the sensor To connect the actuator to the sampler attach the actuator cable to the flow meter connector on the rear of the sampler Refer to the L
139. ation to collect the data SAMPLINK collects data and for mats a_ text file that can load into a word proces sor for editing and a FLOWLINK compatible sample event file SAMPLINK s file contains the same reports produced by the field printer The first report contains sampler status information and program settings The second report contains the sampling results Because the text file is preformatted into report form you can use DOS printing commands to print the file without editing with a word processor The sample event files are identical to those created by FLOWLINK when it retrieves sample event data from an Isco flow meter or flow logger Because these files are fully compatible with FLOWLINK FLOWLINK can use the files in its sampling reports and graphs Non Isco Flow Meters The 3700 Sampler will accept flow pulses from certain non Isco flow meters Two interface accessories convert incom patible non Isco signals to pulses acceptable to the 3700 Sampler The Type A Interface converts pulse duration input the 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface converts 4 20 mA output signals The 3700 Sampler sends event marks to both Isco and non Isco flow meters each time a sample is taken Another item the Liquid Level Actuator is used to provide level sensitive control of the sampler The actuator can be used as an alternative to a flow meter or flow logger 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 1 Technical Specifications o
140. ay 31 BOTTLES PER SAMPLES SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 BOTTLE 1 MAX WY Sample Volume Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 1 _ _ W Display 70 m SUCTION HEAD OF See Liquid Detector configure option FEET 1 MAX Y Display 80 peu a Spl CALIBRATE GAMBLE See Example Calibration Procedure VOLUME YES NO Key Times Display 90 ENTER START TIME m 5 Md Display 91 Display 92 TAKE FIRST SAMPLE START FLOW COUNT AT HH MM DD MMM HH MM DD MMM NZ STANDBY 12 91 31 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Note If you will be using very short sample intervals be sure the interval is longer than the duration of the sampling cycle For truly representative sam pling the interval in either time or flow paced sampling should be longer than the duration of the sampling cycle If the intervals are too short you will not miss any sample events although some events will occur at improper times You can determine the duration of the cycle by pro gramming the sampler with the desired settings pressing the manual sample key and timing the cycle When programming the sampler for flow pacing you must enter the number of pulses that make up the flow interval If the flow meter has been set to send a pulse once every 1 000 gallons you can pro gram the sampler to collect a sample once every 1 000 gallons by entering a flow pulse interval of 1 To colle
141. be distributed to the second bottle group sequentially or according to any of the three available multiplexing distribution schemes bot tles per sample samples per bottle or multiple bottle compositing By dividing the samples into multiple bottles you can analyze the pollutant con centration from each phase of the storm event To obtain an analysis of a composite sample combine the contents of the bottles into a composite for the grab sample and a composite for the flow weighted samples 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 13 shows a storm distribution scheme that combines time paced bottles per sample multiplex ing with flow paced samples per bottle multiplex ing The program has allocated bottles 1 2 and 3 for the timed grab samples and bottles 4 through 24 for flow weighted samples At each time paced sam ple event the sampler places a single sample in the first bottle group bottles 1 2 and 3 Each bottle of the second group receives two samples per bottle Figure 13 Storm Distribution Scheme Bottle Number 12 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sample Event Number 10 11 12 D AQ ZA ZA MA E 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 5 7 9 11 13 Time paced Segment Flow paced Segment Time Bottle Group Flow Bottle Group Programming Introduction The sampler s programming process is self prompt ing Prompts di
142. cates the bottles that will receive samples at the next sample event The second line reports the pulses remaining until the next sample event The sampling program requires three bottles per sample event BOTTLES 5 7 Display 4 AFTER 25 PULSES Indicates the number of the upcoming sample the total number of samples each bottle is to receive and the current bottle number This display indicates that four samples are to be deposited in each bottle 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Display 5 AFTER 10 PULSES 108 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Indicates the sample and bottle numbers of the next sample event The bottle set consists of four bottles The sampling program requires that four samples be placed in each bottle of the set 1 OF 4 BTLS 1 4 Display 6 AFTER 1000 PULSES Indicates the sample and bottle number of the next sample event The sampling program requires that you use one bottle per sample event and that you switch the bottles on a time basis Alternates with the display illustrated in item 8 at 3 second intervals SAMPLE 2 BOTTLE 1 Display 7 AFTER 10 PULSES Indicates the time of the next bottle switch NEXT BOTTLE CHANGE Display 8 AT 10 00 19 JUN Indicates the time of the next bottle switch SAMPLE 2 BTLS 1 4 Display 9 AFTER 10 PULSES Indicates the time of the next bottle set switch NEXT SET CHANGE Display 10 AT 10 00 19 J
143. ct a sample once every 50 000 gallons you would enter a sample interval of 50 pulses Appendix D discusses some of the calculations needed when determining flow pulse intervals 4 Enter the Sample Distribution settings The set tings in the Sample Distribution section allow you to perform sequential or multiplexed sam pling The first display of the Sample Distribu tion section asks whether you want to multiplex samples If you want simple sequential sam pling one sample per bottle select NO The sampler will then prompt you for the Sample Volume settings If you want to use bottles per sample or sam ples per bottle multiplexing select YES The next display will prompt you to select either BOTTLES PER SAMPLE or SAMPLES PER BOTTLE Bottles per sample multiplexing is useful if you require a sample volume greater than the capac ity of a single bottle or where various types of preservatives must be added to the samples Samples per bottle multiplexing is useful when you want to collect a series of small composite samples For example you can collect four sam ples at 15 minute intervals in each bottle resulting in a series of hourly composite sam ples The section Types of Samples discusses the types of multiplexing 5 Enter the Sample Volume settings as shown in the Sample Volume Program section Depending on the selections you make in the configure sequence it may contain prompts for the suctio
144. d 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 6 Routine Maintenance Introduction This chapter covers routine maintenance of the 3700 Portable Samplers It includes the following sections Cleaning the sampler case tubing and sample bottles Cleaning protocols for priority pollutants Replacement of pump tubing Replacement of suction tubing Changing the internal desiccant Cleaning the Sampler The following sections contain instructions for cleaning the sampler case tubing and bottles Cleaning protocols for priority pollutants are given Disassemble the sampler for cleaning by fol lowing the instructions found in Assembly and Dis assembly of the Case in Chapter 2 Case You can clean the top cover and sample bot tle base with warm soapy water or by spraying them with a hose You can clean the center section in a similar manner if a power source is attached to the 12 VDC connector and the flow meter con nector is tightly capped Tubing The suction line and pump tubing can be cleaned by placing the end of the suction line in a cleaning solution and pumping this solution through the tubing system using the pump for ward and pump reverse keys Follow with a clean water rinse Sample Bottles The glass sample bottles have a wide mouth to facilitate cleaning You can be wash them with a brush and soapy water in a dish washer or in an autoclave Do not autoclave the plastic lids The 1000 ml polypropylene plastic w
145. d Resumes The Sampling Stops and Resumes feature available in the extended pro gramming mode allows you to create an intermit 23 tent sampling schedule You can program the sampler to stop the routine at a specific time and then resume the routine later You can enter as many as 12 stop times and 12 resume times Stops and resumes can be used with time paced and flow paced routines and with routines grammed for nonuniform time intervals Figure 12 Multiple Bottle Compositing Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ZA 3 3 6 6 2 2 5 5 8 8 1 1 4 4 7 7 Sample Event Number STORM Programming The 3700 Sampler s STORM programming lets you meet stormwater monitoring requirements easily The 3700 Portables STORM pacing program divides the bottles of the 2 4 8 and 24 bottle configurations into two separate groups The first group receives a first flush time paced grab sam ple The second bottle group receives either a flow paced or time paced composite sample The 3700 Compact s 24 bottle configuration can also be used for STORM programming Storm Event Sample Distribution Schemes A bottle group can consist of one or more bottles Thus the first flush sample can be a large sample delivered to a single bottle or distributed to several bottles with a multiplexing scheme The remaining samples can
146. d after the programmed start time for the first sample This message is reported for all sam ples skipped because of an expired start time Program Halted The sampling routine was interrupted by the STOP or EXIT PROGRAM key when the sample event was to occur Power Lost The sampler was unable to take the sample because the sampler s power source was disconnected Sampler Inhibited The sampler was prevented from taking the sample by an inhibit signal sent to the sampler by a flow meter or a liquid level actua tor Distributor Jammed The sampler was unable to take the sample because the distributor jammed Probable Overflow Overflow is determined by comparing the bottle volume to the product of the sample volume and the number of samples If the product exceeds the bottle volume the sampler will not pump a sample for that sample event and will record the Probable Overflow message Float Weight Tripped 3700 Samplers that are set up for single bottle compositing detect overflow with a liquid level float located at the mouth of the composite bottle If the liquid level of the bottle raises the float past the trip point the sampler will interrupt the sample event and record the Float Weight Tripped condition No More Liquid The sampler was unable to take the sample because in attempting to take the sample the sampler pumped all liquid from the flow stream 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sample
147. d and 3700 Compact Sampler The first line of this display indicates the number of the upcoming sample event and the total number of pro grammed samples The second line indicates the scheduled time of the upcoming event followed by the cur rent time SAMPLE 1 OF 48 Step 25 AT6 00 5 50 43 When the time to the next sample event has elapsed and the sampler has initiated the sample event the sam pling cycle begins Step 26 SAMPLE 1 OF 48 When the pump reverses for the pre sample purge the second line disappears At the end of the pre sample purge the pump runs forward to deliver the sample and the second line appears on the display This display remains through the end of the post sample purge SAMPLE 1 OF 48 PUMPING 250 ml At the end of the sample event the display changes to indicate the number and time of the next event The lower right corner reports the current time SAMPLE 2 OF 48 Step 27 AT6 15 6 00 33 The cycle repeats for the remainder of the sampling routine Step 28 SAMPLE 2 OF 48 Step 29 This display appears when the routine is complete It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 48 SAMPLES Step 30 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 Example 7 shows how to calibrate the sampler for a 200 ml sample volume You must enable the Calibrate Sampler confi
148. d program sequences vary in detail you can divide both into four sections Sample Pacing interval between samples Sample Distribution number of samples in each bottle Sample Volume sample size in ml and Key Times start times or in the extended mode stop and resume times These sections are noted in the Program Sequence section of the dia gram shown in Figure 14 STANDBY 9 50 34 12 SEP 91 Display 1 Program y PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER Configure PROGRAM SEQUENCE lt Sample Pacing NA lt Sample Distribution NZ Key Times PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE CONFIGURE SEQUENCE Set Clock Bottles and Sizes Suction Line Liquid Detector Programming Mode Load Stored Program Save Stored Program Flow Mode Sampling Nonuniform Time Calibrate Sampler Sampling Stop Resume Start Time Delay Enable Pin Event Mark Purge Counts Tubing Life Program Lock Sampler ID Run Diagnostics Exit Configuration Indicates Extended Programming Mode 9 54 40 12 SEP 91 STANDBY Table 4 Configure Option Functions 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Programming Configure Option Mode Function Set Clock Basic amp Extended Sets the sampler s real time clock Bottles and Sizes Basic amp Extended Sets the sampler for Po
149. dis tributor shaft 5 Pull the pump tube out of the distributor arm and coil spring assembly and feed it out of the pump tube port in the center section 6 You can then remove the control box by unscrew ing the six screws indicated in Figure 35 and lifting the center section off the control box 7 Screw the six screws and their lockwashers into the control box to prevent losing them 8 Reattach the liquid detector lid and pump lid to prevent their loss When you return the control box to the factory be sure to pack it securely Take special care to protect the distributor shaft Please include a detailed note explaining the problem Access to Electronic Components To gain access to the electronic components housed in the control box A CAUTION The voltage levels produced by static buildup from walking over carpeted floors movement of woolen or synthetic clothes over chair seats workbenches etc are high enough to destroy CMOS circuitry when you are performing repair work 1 Disconnect the power source from the sampler 2 Remove the 10 screws around the outer edge of the control box bezel as indicated in Figure 33 3 Lift the cover and bezel off the control box and turn it over as shown in Figure 36 4 You can disconnect the control box cover assembly from the control box lower section by disconnect 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ing the five connectors indicated in Figure 36 and the groundi
150. displays will be added to the program sequence and you will be able to precisely calibrate the sample volumes Display 290 Sampling Stop Resume The Sampling Stop Resume configure option lets you add stop and resume settings Display s 100 101 and 102 to the program sequence The Stop Resume settings appear in the key time section of the program sequence You can enter as many as 24 times 12 stop times and 12 resume times For example the Stop Resume option allows you to define a sampling routine which will take samples at intervals of 15 minutes between 6 AM to 8 AM and between 4 PM to 6 PM Sampling Stops and Resumes are not available in a storm routine If you are using a time switched sampling routine that includes the use of stops and resumes the sampler will reset the time switch interval at each resume time If a routine with time switches every hour is programmed for stop and resume times the first time switch would occur an hour after the resume time Switches would repeat every hour until a stop time occurred or the routine was completed See Exam ple 16 Enable Disable Select ENABLE to add the stops and resume settings to the program sequence Display 300 Sample at Stop The Sample at Stop setting directs the sampler to take a sample at stop times Display 301 Sample at Resume The Sample at Resume set ting directs the sampler to take a sample at resume times Display 302 3700 S
151. e During After delay Delay to Start Time The start time is simply the time the sampler begins the routine The sampler begins timing the delay to start time when you press the start sampling key The sam pler will not check for an enable or disable sig nal from a flow meter Liquid Level Actuator or another sampler until the start time The delay to start time is the amount of time between the time you press the start sampling 80 key and the start time The delay to start time is determined by the programmed start time entry for the STORM routine Display 93 or the Start Time Delay configure option The Start Time Delay set in the configure option can be from 0 to 999 minutes long A pro grammed start time can be any date within 30 days of the sampler s current date Delay to First Group Sample The delay to first group sample is the period between the time the sampler is enabled not the start time and the time first sample volume is deliv ered to the first bottle group Your entry in Dis play 15 determines the Delay to First Group Delay to Second Group Samples The delay to second group sample is the period between the time the sampler is enabled not the start time and the time the first sample volume is delivered to the second bottle group This delay is determined by your entry in Display 17 You can enter a delay to second group sample only for time paced second bottle groups e DURING AFTER Thi
152. e PT cst lt lt RST E ORDRAMCS ae 68 7 ua lt u2 3 g GND TP O gt gt GND x 1 6 2_ GND a 5 ms gt gt na lt lt pa o A gt 02 lt lt RAMCS 5 4 13 7 PS R62 CR10 m gt o ei 4 GND ei cks pid 55 25 9 k n 1N914 Ts aio c ato PS 2z R62 CR11 54 26 GND an Han c2 29 27 GKobRo m2 gt gt A2 1N914 18 28 8 us mare ESS 53 29 5 5 Ki cs ma ma LB 470 anona m ms 2 x 52 a R62 CRIs 45 31 5 wv 8 2 gt gt ate T 2 7 lt lt Do lt Be pts Har 8 lt lt 01 18914 12 32 a 5 TOUT 18 A07 A0 Voc 4 Lpy 1 E lt lt D2 8 8 2 35 11 1 10 28 MEE Am TA gt gt soa Vee A gt D 10 Ds pS gt gt po re 77 E n gt M 228 8 1 gt gt ts T lt lt D4 TE Di gt gt D1 P gt gt a es e 12 lt lt 05 8 Bae 39 8 18 T 26 5 mn Tw H gt gt D2 MBA po lt lt po gt gt ose PE lt lt ara d HM 13 De gt Sr gt gt 03 gt 5 Di lt lt 01 M lt RD GND n 1 lt lt 07 4 6 15 5 I pz zu 16 4 iis GND INT D4 gt gt D4 gt 6 02 lt lt gt AS WE wn GND vec T gt gt IROMCS 6 56 42 5
153. e The settings used in this example are for the 4 gallon 15 000 ml composite bottle available with the 3700 Standard This time paced routine will take samples at 15 minute intervals for a 12 hour period Sample volumes are to be 250 ml each When entering the program settings you must enter the number of samples required before entering the sample volumes At four samples per hour the 12 hour period would yield 48 samples The total sample volume collected at the end of the routine would be 12 000 ml 48 samples x 250 ml sam ple well within the capacity of the 4 gallon bottle Example 6 Time paced composite sampling If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the inter active state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER 45 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options until the Bottles and Sizes configure option appears Step 3 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to acce Step 4 SELECT OPTION SET CLOCK ss the Bottles and Sizes settings SELECT OPTION BOTTLES AND SIZES Select PORTABLE for either the 3700 Standard or Compact Step 5 PORTABLE REFRIG SAMPLER Select 1 for single bottle composi
154. e sampler for each routine For example if the sam pler is used at two sites each requiring a specific sampling routine and different suction line lengths the sampling routines can be stored for each site but you must reenter the suction line length settings each time the line changes Dis play 260 Example 9 Save Current Program The sampler is shipped from the factory with four programs the current program and three stored programs numbered from 1 to 3 All four programs contain the factory default program settings Sav ing a program will replace the default program with the current settings Reinitialization of the sampler restores the default program settings shown in Tables 7 and 8 Note Saving a program will overwrite a program saved earlier under the same number You can view settings for the current program with the Display Status procedure Example 9 shows how to save a current sampling program Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Step 1 STANDBY 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE Step 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER the Set Clock configure option Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options The first option displayed is Step 3 SELECT OPTION lt gt SET CLOCK Step 4 i You can save the current program only when the sampler is configured f
155. e equipped with a sam pler enable feature The 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers can inhibit a 3700 until the level of the flow stream reaches a predetermined height or set point When the flow stream reaches that height the flow meter enables the sampler and starts the sampling routine If the level of the stream falls below the set point the flow meter can disable the sampler and halt the routine Certain flow meters when equipped with a rain gauge monitor rainfall You can program the flow meter to enable the sampler when the measured amount of rainfall reaches a predetermined set point You can select set points or pairs of set points pairs can be level and rainfall rates level and elapsed time rainfall and elapsed time and so on from the sampler enable control condition A 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler control condition is simply the set of parameters defining the conditions in which a flow meter will enable the sampler For example the user can pro gram a flow meter with a control condition which is satisfied when the flow meter detects 1 4 inch of rainfall in 15 minutes Although you can enter level control conditions directly at the flow meter s front panel you must download most control condi tions to the flow meter from an IBM compatible computer running Isco s FLOWLINK software In addition to enable control conditions Isco s 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters
156. e is highest and less frequently as the flow rate decreases You can also use nonuniform times to simulate flow paced sampling When the flow rate varies predictably using nonuniform time intervals allows you to take samples at equal flow volumes As the flow rate increases you can take samples at equal flow volumes by decreasing the time inter val As the flow rate decreases you can increase the time interval 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When you use nonuniform times the time interval between each sample event is programmable You can enter nonuniform times in two ways in minutes or in clock times The first method minutes allows you to enter the number of sample events spaced at intervals defined in minutes 12 samples at 5 minute intervals six samples at 10 minute inter vals four samples at 15 minute intervals and so on You can also enter a specific clock time and date for each sample event sample event 1 at 6 00 on April 20 sample event 2 at 6 30 on April 20 sample event 3 at 7 15 on April 20 You can specify as many as 999 sample events spaced in nonuniform minutes or as many as 99 events as clock times If a routine requires a large number of nonuniform times you can save the routine with the program storage feature so that you do not have to reenter the nonuniform times You can use nonuniform time intervals with sequential multiplexed and composite sampling Extended Multiplexing Multiplexing
157. e is correct Check to see that the wiring harnesses connec tors and solder joints are in good condition Look for signs of physical damage such as burned or broken components overly hot compo nents or evidence of water damage Check for shorted or open diodes and transis tors especially driver transistors Ensure that voltage regulators working properly Check to see if there is excessive current draw in some or all of the circuitry Be sure that correct input signals are sent to the unit Check to see that the crystal oscillator is operat ing and at proper frequency 9 Examine the reset circuitry to be sure that it is working properly 10 Check lithium battery for 3 VDC output when main power is removed Circuit Boards The following is a general description of the 3700 Sampler electronic circuitry While reading this description refer to the schematic diagram Fig ure 41 the case schematic diagram Figure 43 and the pictorial views of the circuit boards Fig ures 40 and 42 127 The 3700 Sampler is a microprocessor based device that executes a software program stored in ROM The program is a series of instructions that tell the microprocessor what to do in order to accomplish the various functions that the sampler must per form In the following discussion of the hardware the software is discussed only as is necessary to describe the operation of the circuitry The A 12 VDC connector on
158. e or more sample events 2 SAMPLES WILL BE SKIPPED 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 18 Program started later than programmed start time This display informs you of the expired start time The sampler presents this display for a short time then advance to the next display PAST START TIME This display reports the number of samples that will be skipped if you do not change the start time it appears only if more than one sample event time has passed 1 SAMPLES WILL BE SKIPPED Select YES if you want to change the start time Select NO if missed samples are acceptable CHANGE START TIME YES NO Display 142 This display appears when you select YES in display 142 and a sample event is to occur at the start time Enter the new start time TAKE FIRST SAMPLE AT 12 30 19 JUN Display 9 This display appears when you select YES in display 142 and no sample is to occur at the start time for a flow paced sampling routine Enter the new start time START FLOW COUNT AT 12 30 19 Display 9 Example 19 Program started later than programmed first switch time This display informs you of the expired switch time The sampler presents this display for a short time then advances to the next display PAST SWITCH TIME Select YES to change the switch time Select NO to continu
159. e routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 24 SAMPLES Step 16 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 Example 3 shows how to program the sampler to take flow paced samples at intervals of 5 pulses One 500 ml sample is to be placed in each bottle The sampling program will default to the value entered in Start Time Delay option Example 3 Flow paced sequential sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select FLOW TIME FLOW Step 3 PACED SAMPLING Enter 5 as the flow pulse interval The sampler will take a sample every fifth flow pulse received SAMPLE EVERY al 5 PULSES 1 9999 Select NO Step 5 MULTIPLEX SAMPLES YES NO Enter 500 to set the sample volume at 500 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF Step 6 500 10 1000 38 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Select NO ENTER START TIME Stepi YES NO After this message displays briefly the sampler automatically returns to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 8 COMPLETE After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPL
160. e sampler may fill the second bottle group before it fills the first bottle group This can occur when the flow rate monitored by the flow meter is higher than anticipated and the flow pulse interval has not been adjusted to reflect the higher rate If this occurs the sampler will con tinue the first bottle group until all samples have been taken You can adjust the pulse interval by Reprogramming the flow meter to change the number of flow pulses sent to the sampler by the flow meter e Reprogramming the sampler to change the flow pulse interval in the flow pacing segment of the STORM routine Reprogramming both the flow meter and the sampler STORM Key Times The third section STORM Key Times contains the displays used to e Enter suction head measurements e Enable the calibration routine Enter a start time for the storm routine 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The input displays of the STORM program sequence vary according to configure option set tings The first two displays SUCTION HEAD OF FEET and CALIBRATE SAMPLE VOL UME appear if the sampler is configured to add them to the storm program sequence Entries in the Liquid Detector configure option and the Cali brate Sampler configure option add or exclude these displays from the sequence Example 17 does not include these displays To enter a specific start time for the routine select YES in Display 90 illustrated in Step 19 of
161. e the routine CHANGE SWITCH TIME YES NO Display 143 This display appears when you select YES in display 143 and the bottles per sample event is set at 1 Enter the new switch time FIRST BOTTLE CHANGE AT 5 30 19 JUN Display 46 This display appears when you select YES in display 148 and the bottles per sample event is set to a num ber greater than one Enter the new switch time FIRST SET CHANGE AT 5 30 19 Display 47 102 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 20 Program started later than programmed stop time reverts to standby This display informs you of the expired stop time The sampler presents this display for a short time then PAST STOP TIME PLEASE REPROGRAM You must access the program sequence to change the expired stop and resume times Once you ve made the changes start the routine again with the start sampling key 10 22 34 STANDBY 21 JUN 91 Start Sampling Once you have programmed and configured the sampler use the START SAMPLING key to run the sampling program There are two instances where the sampler will not be able to run the program immediately When the program has been started after the programmed start time or after one or more programmed stop times When you press the START SAMPLING key after a program has been halted the sampler will give you
162. e the sample deliv by displaying the word PUMPING and the sample volume being delivered The message remains during the sample delivery and post sample purge 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 75 ml When the sampling cycle is completed the display will indicate the upcoming sample shown here This dis play indicates that the upcoming sample is the second of four samples the current sample bottle is bottle 1 The sample event is scheduled for 6 15 The current time is just after 6 00 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 17 AT 6 15 6 00 26 The next displays illustrated here in steps 78 and 19 show the displays as the sample volumes are deposited in bottle 1 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 Step 18 2 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 75 ml Step 19 3 OF 4 BOTTLE 1 AT 6 30 6 15 27 85 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When the final sample has been deposited in the first bottle the display changes to indicate the new sample bottle This display indicates that the upcoming sample event will place the first of four sample volumes in bottle 2 at 7 00 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 2 Step 20 7 00 6 45 25 This display appears as the pump delivers the first sample to bottle 2 Step 21 1 OF 4 BOTTLE 2 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 22 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the statu
163. eaviest with 24 bottle sleeve inside the unit weighs only 62 pounds Programmable Features An intuitive user interface lets you easily program the 3700s for both simple and complex sampling schemes The LCD prompts you through the pro gramming process by presenting a choice or a question on the LCD To program the 3700s you merely respond to dis played prompts with the keypad Two program ming modes basic and extended are standard with the 3700 Series The basic programming mode allows you to set up typical sampling routines easily and efficiently The extended programming mode expands the ver satility of the sampler by providing options that let you create complex sampling routines The LCD not only prompts you through the pro gramming process but also allows you to closely monitor a sampling routine as it is executed The LCD shows pertinent information about the rou tine for example the time of the next sample and notifies you of any problems encountered during the routine As the routine progresses the sampler logs stores key information about the results of the routine The results include the start time any halt and resume times time of samples and cause of any missed samples This information is accessi ble during a routine or after a sampling routine is finished You can view this information from the sampler s display or retrieve the information with the field printer or a laptop compu
164. ection for each event time the routine was completed sampler ID current time and date program settings Each of these items is illustrated in Example 21 When you press DISPLAY STATUS the display shown below follows the pump tubing warning It allows you to review the program settings or sampling results REVIEW PRINT PROGRAM INFORMATION Display 148 Review Select REVIEW to review the program settings and sampling results The sampler will present the display shown below Use this display to leave the Display Status procedure or to review the program settings or sampling results REVIEW PROGRAM NO SETTINGS RESULTS Display 19 No Select NO to return to the previous operat ing state If you entered Display Status from standby the standby message will reappear If you entered Display Status from the run state the sampling routine will resume Settings Select SETTINGS to review the pro gram settings Use the left arrow right arrow and the enter program keys to move through the sam pling settings When the right arrow or the enter program key is pressed at the last settings display the REVIEW PROGRAM display will reappear Results Select RESULTS to review the results of the sampling routine The first display reports the time and date the sampling program started Use the left and right arrows and enter program keys to move through the results
165. ection is available to aid in transportation Attach the cover to the base in the same manner as the center section It is good practice to attach an adhesive label detailing the location time date etc of sampling to avoid confusion When exchanging bottle tubs it is also good prac tice to check the charge of the sampler s battery If the sampler s battery is questionable exchange it with a freshly charged battery With the 3700 Compact there is no need to change bases Slide the sleeve out to remove the bottles for transporting off site Place caps on the bottles and you may want to attach an adhesive label with rel evant details on the sleeve as noted above Restarting After you have installed the base sec tion with empty bottles in the portable or replaced the full bottles in the sleeve with empty ones in the compact start the sampler again by pressing the start sampling key You may need to reprogram the start time if one has been entered Sampler Locking To prevent tampering with the controls and sam ple bottles the sampler can be locked with the locking cable accessory package For standard size 3700 Samplers use P N 68 6700 134 use P N 68 6700 111 for 3700 Compact Sampler The sampler is secured with three stainless steel cables and a padlock To secure the sampler place the hook on the end of the cable through the hole on the latch as shown in Figure 7 Repeat this with the other two cables and gather
166. ection of the control box To gain access to the lower section of the control box follow the instructions in the Access to Electronic Compo nents section Follow the steps below to gain access to these and other components in the lower section of the control box 1 2 Disconnect power from the unit Remove the 2 nuts and the screw shown in Fig ure 38 Remove the ground strap by removing the remaining screw Lift the plastic tray straight up out of the con trol box The distributor gear case can be removed from the control box by removing the four screws and the ground straps shown in Figure 39 The distributor gear case can be reinstalled by reversing these steps Ensure that you replace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps Removal of the Pump Gear Case Assembly The pump gear case assembly is located in the lower section of the control box For access to the lower section of the control box follow the instruc tions in the section entitled Access to Electronic Components Follow the steps below to remove the pump gear case 1 Remove the distributor gear case as discussed in Removal of the Distributor Gear Case Assembly 2 Remove the liquid detector lid and the pump lid by loosening the captivated thumbscrews on the pump exterior Figure 31 shows the location of the thumbscrews Remove the pump tubing from the interior of the pump Remove the pump rotor by loosening the machine screw
167. edge shaped sample bottles also have a wide mouth and are formed so that they have no inac cessible corners You can wash plastic bottles in a dishwasher but do not autoclave them Cleaning Protocols for Priority Pollutants The following sections are taken from U S Environ mental Protection Agency Publications EPA 600 4 77 039 Sampling of Water and Wastewater by Dr Phillip E Shelley for an example of sampler clean ing procedures for priority pollutants Proper Cleaning The proper cleaning of equip ment used in the sampling of water and wastewa 115 ter is essential to ensuring valid results from laboratory analysis Cleaning protocols should be developed for all sampling equipment early in the design of the wastewater characterization pro gram The laboratory analyst should be consulted both to ensure that the procedures and techniques are adequate as well as to avoid including prac tices that are not warranted in view of the analysis to be performed Cleaning Examples As an example Lair 1974 has set down the standard operating procedures for the cleaning of sample bottles and field proce dures equipment used by USEPA Region IV Sur veillance and Analysis field personnel engaged in NPDES compliance monitoring They are repro duced below for a typical automatic sampler and related sampling equipment Isco Glass Sample Bottles 1 2 One spectro grade acetone rinse Dishwasher cycle wash and tap
168. en pauses until the next sample event occurs at which time the cycle repeats for the following bottle set Figure 11 illustrates bot tles per sample multiplexing Types of Sampling Available Through the Extended Programming Mode The extended programming mode expands the variations of sample pacing and distribution The extended features listed below are used in more complex sampling routines Note however that the sampling capabilities described in the section Types of Sample are available in both the basic and the extended programming modes Note also that STORM programming is available only in the extended programming mode Nonuniform Time Intervals In the extended programming mode the 3700 Sampler can pace samples at nonuniform time intervals With non uniform time intervals the 3700 takes samples at irregular intervals rather than at equal intervals Nonuniform time intervals are typically used in run off studies often in conjunction with a Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator Nonuniform time intervals let you collect a number of samples at short intervals after a rainfall or other event occurs and collect remaining samples at widening intervals For example when you use the sampler with the actuator in a run off study the actuator turns on the sampler when the liquid level of the flow stream rises to contact the actuator s probe With nonuniform time intervals the sampler can collect samples frequently when the flow rat
169. ended switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been Compositing deposited Storm Volumes and Accuracy Enter volumes from 10 to 990 ml for the time paced and flow Sample Volume Extended paced segments separately Suction Head Extended You can enter suction heads from 1 to 20 feet Calibration Extended Calibrate sample volumes if desired Sets calibration using the timed sample volume only Storm Key Times Enter a time of up to 99 minutes to delay the first sample deliv ered to the first bottle group The delay begins after the pro oe First Group Extended grammed start time for the STORM routine In applications where P there is a flow meter programmed to enable the sampler the delay begins after the sampler is enabled A time of up to 99 minutes can be entered to delay the first sample delivered to the second bottle group when the second bottle group Delay to Second Group Extended receives time paced samples The delay begins after the pro Sample grammed start time for the STORM routine In applications where there is a flow meter programmed to enable the sampler the delay begins after the sampler is enabled You can enter a specific start time for the STORM routine If no Start Tics Extended start time is entered the Start Time Delay will be used You can enter maximum period of time between flow paced sample Maximum Flow Interval Extended events If this period of time i
170. enter 0 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry Rinse cycles condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination Step 18 ORINSE CYCLES 0 3 This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 15 For the purposes of the following examples select NO to omit the setting Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection ENTER HEAD MANUALLY Step 17 YES NO This display appears when you select ENABLE in step 15 For the purposes of this example set the number of retries to 0 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry This setting determines the number of times the sampler will try to detect the presence of liquid for each sample event RETRY UP TO 0 TIMES Step 18 WHEN SAMPLING 0 3 To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key SELECT OPTION lt gt Step 19 PROGRAMMING MODE Select BASIC Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection BASIC EXTENDED Step 20 PROGRAMMING MODE Scroll through the remaining options with the arrow keys Use the techniques above to change or verify the settings If you want to reinitialize the configure and program settings to factory settings follow the proce dures given in Steps 22 to 28 L Step 21 To access the displays used in this option press the ENTER PROGRAM key The displays illustrated in Steps 23 to 26 require no r
171. enter for the delay to sec ond group is equal to or greater than if necessary the delay to the first group plus the total amount of time required to fill the first group The sampler will begin timing both delays delay to first and delay to second bottle group at the same time Refer to the lower diagram in Figure 24 Entries made in Display s 15 23 and 24 MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST GROUP SAMPLE TAKE TIMED EVENTS and SAMPLE INTERVALS OF MINUTES determine the amount of time required to fill the first bottle group For example if the delay to the first group were 0 and the routine required two timed sample events at 30 minute intervals the sampler would take 30 minutes to fill the first bottle group The first sam ple event would occur after the programmed delay to group sample the second sample event would occur 30 minutes later Use Display 24 to enter the time interval for the second bottle group You can use any interval you do not have to use the same time interval for the second bottle group that you used for the first group Flow Pacing for the second bottle group If you need a flow paced sample for the second bottle group select FLOW from Display 14 Three flow pacing displays 16 22 and 110 will follow DURING AFTER TIME MODE Display 16 SAMPLE EVERY PULSES 1 9999 Display 22 MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF Display 110 HOURS MINUTES
172. er discussions do include display numbers should you need to refer to Appendix C Set Clock Use this option to synchronize the sampler s clock with real time You must make entries using mili tary time 9 30 AM would be entered as 9 30 9 30 PM would be entered as 21 30 etc When the sam pler accepts a year entry the seconds will be reset to zero Display 210 Bottles and Sizes You can use the Bottles and Sizes option to enter the number of bottles and the bottle volume The option uses four input displays The first display specifies a Portable or Com pact Sampler The second display sets the number of bottles 1 4 12 or 24 for portable configurations The second display appears only when you specify a Portable sampler in the first display 50 The third display sets the number of bottles 1 2 4 8 12 24 for Portable Samplers The fourth display sets the bottle volume Because the 3700 Series Standard and Compact Samplers use the same control box you specify the type of unit as PORTABLE You should not spec ify REFRIG unless you move the control box to refrigerated base Display 220 Bottle options If you specify PORTABLE in the previous display you will be able to specify a 1 4 12 or 24 bottle configuration The sampler comes configured for the number of bottles ordered with the sampler Change this configuration setting whenever you change bottle sets Display 221 The
173. er on the new suction line and tighten the hose clamp You can now install the new suction line in the pump as described in the section Attaching the Vinyl Suc tion Line to the Pump Tubing Teflon Suction Line Remove the suction line from the pump by loosen ing the clamp that secures the line to the pump tube and pulling the suction line out of the pump tube If you must use a new suction line either with or without the optional stainless steel strainer install it as described in the section Attaching the Teflon Suction Line to the Pump Tub ing Chapter 2 To install the optional stainless steel strainer carefully slip the strainer s tapered connector inside the suction line and tighten the hose clamp supplied with the strainer as shown in Figure 5 Changing the Internal Desiccant A humidity indicator labeled INTERNAL CASE HUMIDITY is located in the lower left corner of the control panel It indicates the amount of mois ture present inside the control box The paper indi cator is blue when the control box is dry The control box is a completely sealed unit You do not need to open the control box during normal operation The desiccant should absorb any mois ture that may accumulate in the control box Thus the humidity indicator should remain blue under normal conditions If moisture does accumulate the numbered areas on the indicator will turn light pink or white starting with the area numbered 20 This i
174. erage flow is 2 6 MGD and it is desired to collect a sam ple every 30 minutes The flow increment between samples is calculated 2 5 MGD 2 500 000 ga day 2 500 000 gal day x 1 day 24 hr x 1 hr 60 min 1736 gal min 736 gal min x 30 min sample 52 080 gal sample Thus the desired flow increment between samples is approximately 52 000 gallons Number of Samples Known Alternatively if the total number of samples to be collected over the total sampling period is known the flow increment between samples can be determined by calculating how much total flow will occur during the sam pling period and dividing this by the total number of samples to be collected For example assume that the average flow is 1 75 MGD that the com posite sampling period is 2 days and that it is desired to collect 100 individual samples The flow increment between samples is calculated 1 75 MGD 1 750 000 gal day 1 750 000 gal day x 2 days 3 500 000 gal 3 500 000 gal 100 samples 35 000 gal sample Thus the desired flow increment between samples is approximately 35 000 gallons 160 Calculation of Number of Flow Pulses Once the desired flow increment between samples is known the number of flow pulses to be pro grammed into the sampler may be calculated assuming that the volume of the flow pulses from the flow meter is known The number of flow pulses is calculated by dividing the flow increment between samples by the volume of each flo
175. es No odor Melting Point N A Solubility in Water Insoluble Bulk Density 57 64 lbs cu ft Percent Volatile by Weight at 150 deg lt 3 0 SECTION IV FIRE EXPLOSION DATA Fire and Explosion Hazard Negligible fire and explosion hazard when exposed to heat or flame by reaction with incompatible substances Flash Point Nonflammable Firefighting Media Dry chemical water spray or foam For larger fires use water spray fog or foam Firefighting Nonflammable solids liquids or gases Cool containers that are exposed to flames with water from the side until well after fire is out For massive fire in enclosed area use unmanned hose holder or monitor nozzles if this is impossible withdraw from area and let fire burn Withdraw immediately in case of rising sound from venting safety device or any discoloration of the tank due to fire SECTION V HEALTH HAZARD DATA This material is normally packaged and contained in a bag If the bag is open the resulting dust is classified a nuisance dust and may cause health hazards when inhaled ingested or in contact with the eyes and skin Prolonged inhalation may cause irritation to the upper respiratory tract and or lung damage If large amounts are ingested intestinal disorders may occur Contact with eye tissue may result in irritation Prolonged or repeated contact with the skin in the absence of proper hygiene may cause irritation DESI PAK clay may contain a small amount
176. es of air space between the top of the bags and the next metal tray above the bags Keep the tray a minimum of 16 inches from the heating element Heat the bags at a temperature of 240 to 250 F 116 to 121 C for 12 to 16 hours At the end of the time period the bags should be immediately removed and placed in an air tight container for cooling The desiccant will be recharged to approximately 80 to 90 of its previ ous capacity After repeated recharging the desic cant bag may require replacement Some bags will have the temperature and time for recharging the desiccant printed on the bag If they differ use the temperature and time printed on the bag Before reinstalling the cover coat the cover s gas ket with a light film of silicone grease to seal the control box Tighten the 10 screws that hold the control box cover and bezel in place using an even cross torquing pattern 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 33 Location of 10 Screws on Control Box Bezel 1 of 10 Screws Programming Instructions 1 To place the sampler in a programming mode press ae re Use To pt the blinking selection pr 3 Use the numeric keys to change program v CONTROL KEYS return to a previous v START START SAMPLING 4 To run the program pres PUMP RE 5 To halt sampling or stop the pump ss REVERSE SAMPLING To accept a value press view program parameters press PUMP MANUAL FORWARO SAMPLE H
177. esponse SELECT OPTION lt gt Step 22 RUN DIAGNOSTICS The sampler displays the software revision number for a short period of time SOFTWARE REVISION Step 23 84 6 The software revision display will be replaced by the RAM and ROM test messages A successful test is indi cated by the messages RAM PASSED TEST and ROM PASSED TEST RAM PASSED TEST Step 24 TESTING ROM After successful RAM and ROM tests the sampler will then test the LCD by first filling the display with solid rectangles and then printing the alphabet and other characters Each position in the display should contain a character ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST Step 25 UVWXYZ Y abcdefgh 35 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The next step tests the pump During the test the pump will run briefly and the display will indicate an OFF ON number The number should fall within the range of 50 to 200 A count near 100 is typical PUMP COUNT TEST Step 26 OFF ON 105 For the purposes of this example select NO to skip the test Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the selection TEST DISTRIBUTOR Step 27 YES NO If you want to reinitialize the settings select YES The entire RAM with the exception of the current pump count total bottle size settings suction line settings and sampler ID will be reinitialized to factory settings The sampler will
178. ess tasteless deprive tissues of oxy limit pro certain depth gas manufactured indicator flammable gen Does not support vided oxy gas sewer gas Strata 2 Oxygen deficiency life gen percen of sedimentary origin indicator tage is suffi In swamps or cient for life marshes Nitrogen Simple asphyxiant Color 0 97 Physiologically inert Near top but may be Sewer gas sludge Oxygen deficiency 2 less tasteless Nonflam found near bottom gas Also issues from indicator mable Principle constituent of air about 79 some rock strata 18 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler v Max Safe Safe Explosive Simplest and Specific Likely Location Most Gas Common 4 1 Physiological 60 Min 8 Hour Range Cheapest Safe i Gravity M of Highest Common Chemical Properties Effects Exposure Exposure Limits lower Method of Air 1 Concentration Sources ppm ppm upper Testing Nitrogen 50 10 Near bottom Industrial wastes NO detector tube Oxide Common air pollutant NO Colorless 1 04 60 to 150 ppm causes irritation and coughing 0 Colorless sweet odor 1 53 Asphyxiant NO2 Reddish brown irritating 1 58 odor Deadly poison 100ppm dangerous 200ppm fatal Oxygen Colorless odorless taste 1 11 Normal air contains Variable at Oxygen depletion Oxygen deficiency in air less 20 8 of 05 Man can different levels from indicator O2
179. essing any key except STOP and ON OFF Display3 eme COUNTS FORWARD This informational display appears when you stop the pump with the STOP key after having pressed the PUMP REVERSE key It reports the number of pump counts detected while the pump was in operation Exit this dis play by pressing any key except STOP and ON OFF Im COUNTS REVERSE This display appears after you select PROGRAM in Display 1 Select TIME for time paced sampling FLOW for flow paced sampling TIME FLOW Display 10 PACED SAMPLING This display appears only in the extended programming mode and follows Display 10 when you have selected TIME Select UNIFORM for uniform time intervals NONUNIFORM for nonuniform time intervals UNIFORM NONUNIFORM Display 11 TIME INTERVALS This display appears after you select PROGRAM in Display 1 It appears only when the sampler is config ured for the extended programming mode and for 4 12 or 24 bottles with the 3700 Portable and 12 or 24 bot tles with the 3700 Compact Select TIME for time paced sampling Select FLOW for flow paced sampling and STORM for storm sampling TIME FLOW STORM Display 12 PACED SAMPLING 150 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears after you select STORM in Display 12 Use to select time or flow pacing for the sec
180. example you can enable the Sampling Stop and Resumes and or Nonuniform Times features so you can use them in the extended program sequence When you select the basic programming mode these configure options are not available to you As in the programming sequence less frequently used options have been separated to simplify the config uration process Most configure options are available in both pro gramming modes Table 4 summarizes the config ure sequence options each option is marked as available in both modes or available only in the extended mode A detailed discussion of each con figuration option is found in the sections beginning with Set Clock through Exit Configuration It is usually not necessary to change the configure option settings unless the sampling application changes significantly The sampler is always pro grammed and configured the sampler s internal battery maintains program and configure settings In fact the sampler is shipped with factory pro gram and configure settings It is configured for the basic program mode and for the bottle configu ration and suction line ordered with the sampler Introduction to the Programming Procedure The procedure used to program the sampler fol lows the steps listed below Note Because the con figuration settings determine portions of the program sequence and affect the accuracy of the sample check the configuration settings before programming 1 Determine t
181. f the 3700 Standard Sampler Physical Specifications Physical Size Height 25 25 in 64 1 cm Diameter 19 88 in 50 5 cm Dry Weight 37 5 lbs 17 0 kg with polypropylene bottles Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 F 20 to 60 C Control Box Self Certified NEMA 4X and 6 ratings Submersible watertight dust tight and corrosion resistant Sampler Base Capacity 1 Sequential Base 24 350 ml glass or 1000 ml polypropylene bot tles or 1 2 5 gallon 9500 ml glass or polyethylene container 2 Optional Composite Base 1 4 gallon 15 000 ml polyethylene container Base Insulation Standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 Power Specifications Sampler Power Requirement 12 VDC supplied by battery or AC popwer converter Sampler standby current 10 m maximum Power Pack Requirement Use only Isco made power packs certified by UL P N 60 1684 088 120 VAC 12 VAC 60 Hz 1 0 Amp Note This is the only version certified by UL The line cord mains connect cable is the Disconect Device External Isco Nickel Cadmium Note Not certified by UL 7 standard sampling programs 24 samples at a rate of 1 200 ml sample per hour using 10 ft of vinyl suction line at 5 ft head External Isco Lead Acid Battery Note Not certified by UL 11 standard sampling programs 24 samples
182. filling If you are using a nonstandard bottle enter a bottle vol ume smaller than the actual bottle capacity This will help prevent overfilling There are approxi mately 3 785 ml per gallon 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 5 Bottle Volume Settings for Standard Bottle Configurations Bottle Configuration Bottle Size Bottle Volume Setting Compatibility 24 polypropylene 1000 ml 1000 5 24 polyethylene 500 ml 500 24 glass 350 ml 350 S 12 polypropylene glass 945 ml 945 S 12 polypropylene glass 300 ml 300 C 4 glass and polyethylene 1 gal 3800 S 1 glass and polyethylene 2 5 gal 9400 S 1 polyethylene 4 gal 15 000 S Note Under Compatibility S 3700 Standard and C 3700 Compact Cumulative Error The sample accuracy is the greater of 1096 of the sample volume or 20 ml and is repeatable to 10 ml Since samples of 200 ml can vary by 10 or 20 ml the cumulative error for four samples would be 80 ml If the sampler consistently places an actual sample volume of 220 ml for each of the four samples the total volume held by the bottle would be 880 ml Again to avoid possible overfilling enter a bottle volume that is less than the actual bottle capacity Suction Line You can use the Suction Line configure option to configure the sampler for the type vinyl or Teflon diameter and length of the suction line used The volumetric delivery varies wi
183. g routine is completed Step 21 When the routine is complete the display will indicate the status of the routine DONE the number of sam ple events and the current time and date DONE 12 SAMPLES Step 22 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 In Example 13 samples are to be taken at intervals of 1 000 flow pulses Samples will be multiplexed by placing 100 ml sample volumes into two bottles at each sample event To avoid missing any samples the sampling routine starts immediately after you press the start sampling key To place the bottle set changes at the top of the hour the sampler will be allowed to take samples until 12 00 the time of the first bottle set change After the first change bottle sets will change every two hours Note The number of samples in each bottle set will vary as the flow rate varies If at least one sample is desired in each bottle the sampler should be directed to take a sample at the start and switch times See the section Flow Mode Sampling which describes this option Example 13 Flow paced sampling with bottle sets based on time Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select FLOW TIME FLOW STORM Step PACED SAMPLING 88 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sam
184. g the Debris Deflector to the Strainer A debris deflector prevents debris from accumulating on the hose clamp which attaches the strainer to the suction line The inch polypropylene strainer is shipped with the suction line attached and the debris deflector in place To replace the suction line on a strainer with a debris deflector 1 Push the deflector back up the line to expose the hose clamp 2 Loosen the clamp and pull the line from the strainer s ferrule 3 Remove the deflector from the old line and thread it on the new line Push the deflector back on the new line leave enough room to work with the hose clamp 4 Thread the hose clamp on the new line 5 Slip the line onto the ferrule and secure it with the hose clamp 6 Push the debris deflector down the line and onto the strainer Figure 5 Attaching the Debris Deflector Deflector Hose Clamp Connection to Power Source The 3700 Series must use one of four 12 VDC power sources an Isco AC Power Pack an Isco Nickel Cad mium Battery Pack an Isco sealed lead acid bat tery or an external 12V direct current source such as an automotive or marine battery For complete information on these power options and how to maintain them refer to the Power Products Guide that was shipped with your sampler Placement of the Sampler Refer to Figure 6 for sampler placement Place your sampler on a relatively flat surface Placing it on a steep incline ma
185. ge state before applying power you can prevent arcing at the relay contacts The LED phototransistor device IC201 is key element of the pump revolution count sensor Whenever the pump is running power is supplied to IC201 A rotating disk positioned between the LED and phototransistor periodically interrupts the transmitted signal These interruptions create pulses which are sent back to the main board at pin 8 of P7 to be counted The microprocessor then uses these counts to determine the pumped volume Figure 40 Optical Counter PCB Component Layout 203 204 R201 Q202 R2021 FL 208 209 210 OO 2110 O 212 ac cp erunt 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 41 3700 Controller Main Circuit Board Schematic
186. gnal Ignored Sampler enabled at Delay to First NOTE Before programming a sampler in the extended programming mode the sampler must be configured for extended programming Refer to the section Programming Mode for a discussion of the Programming Mode configure option Example 1 shows the steps required to access the Program ming Mode option Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure The 3700 Samplers provide displays in French Spanish and German Additionally the software supports entries in metric units of measure Metric units include volumes in milliliters suction head and suction line length in decimeters and suction line ID in millimeters Delay to First Timed Sample start time Timed Sample Sampler enabled Sampler disabled at sampler Disabled start time 81 Storm Sampling Routine Storm Sampling M Routine Samplers using French Spanish and German lan guage displays support metric units for suction line and suction head measurements Samplers with English displays support either English or metric units for suction line and suction head measure ments Always enter sample volumes in milliliters To program the sampler for foreign language dis plays begin by placing the sampler in standby Then be sure the sampler is configured for extended programming Access the language pro gramming sequence by pressing the stop
187. gure option in the configure sequence before the calibration displays shown below appear Even without calibrating the 3700 Sampler delivers accurate sample volumes If your sample volumes vary significantly with the entered values check the suction line first Be sure the line slopes continuously down hill and is draining completely after each pumping cycle Then check the suction line entries in the configure sequence to see that they are accurate The calibration procedure is intended to be for fine tuning only After you enter the sample volume actually delivered as shown in Step 8 all subsequent sample volumes delivered will be adjusted to correct for the difference between the expected sample volume and the actual volume entered Clear the adjustment by changing a suction line entry in the Suction Line configure option or by reinitialization of the sampler Because the sample volume can be calibrated to 10 ml use a graduated cylinder to facilitate measure ment Isco offers a graduated cylinder and spare bottles as accessories from the factory Refer to the Acces sories List at the back of this manual for details The calibration pump cycle will include rinse cycles and retries if the sampler is configured to perform them This ensures that the calibration procedure includes the pump cycle used while running the sam pling program 48 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 7 Calibration Press ENTER PROGRAM
188. he equipment you will be using with the sampler You will need to know the capacity of the bottles and the inside diameter type vinyl or Teflon and length of the suction line You will need this information to verify and revise the configuration settings in step 2 If you will be using the sampler for composite sampling you may need to convert the sampler 27 The section Conversion for Composite Sampling in Chapter 5 provides information on converting the 3700 Standard for composite sampling Example 6 demonstrates the configuration changes you must make 2 Check the configuration settings From standby access the interactive state Select the configure sequence Check the configuration settings revising any settings as needed select basic or extended programming mode Return to the standby state Example 1 shows you how to check and revise the configuration settings in the configure sequence We recommend you review the upcoming sections Keypad Description and Dis plays before you work through the programming examples These sections discuss the functions of the individual keys and how to use the keys when programming the sampler 3 Program the sampler Again from standby access the interactive state Select the program sequence Enter the program settings for your routine The sampler will prompt you through the programming process When the process is completed the sampler will automatically return to standby For
189. he sampler operates at diminished accuracy Display 240 Rinse Cycles The Rinse Cycle setting is avail able only when the detector is enabled It sets the number of suction line rinses from 0 to 3 Rinses are used to condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination During a rinse cycle the pump draws liquid up through the line until the liquid detector senses it At that point the pump reverses to purge the line This cycle repeats according to the number of rinse cycles entered Display 241 Rinse cycles contribute to the wear on pump tubing therefore if you use rinse cycles you may need to replace the tubing more fre quently The Tubing Life configure option allows you to monitor pump tubing wear Enter Head Manually When the detector is enabled you can optionally enter the head manu ally allowing you to add the suction head entry Display 70 to the program sequence When the detector is disabled the Suction Head entry is automatically added to the program sequence By disabling the suction head setting you allow the liquid detector to determine the oper ating suction head each time a sample is taken 52 When the head is stable and known accurately you can further increase the accuracy of the delivered volume by using the Suction Head entry in con junction with the liquid detector When the head is variable or unknown select NO because an incor rect head setting will diminish the delivered vo
190. her suction lift sample gathering methods the peristaltic pump has numerous advantages simplicity reliability no requisite metering chamber an easy to clean design etc Volumetric Determination The 3700 Sampler determines the volumetric delivery of its peristal tic pump by electronically counting revolutions of the pump rotor Each revolution of the pump rotor corresponds to a fixed number of pump counts and a certain volume of sample liquid However the volume of liquid delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor changes with the suction head and the type of suction line At each sample event the 3700 liquid detection system automatically com pensates for changes in suction head and adjusts the volume delivered for each revolution of the pump Thus for a given type of suction line each revolution of the pump rotor results in the delivery of a known amount of sample volume 132 Sample Delivery There are three parts to the sample pumping portion of a sample event suc tion line fill liquid detection and sample volume delivery The sampler counts the number of pump revolutions as the suction line fills At liquid detec tion the controller uses that count to determine the number of pump revolutions required to deliver the programmed sample volume Sample Volume Variation Be sure to note that the volume delivered by a peristaltic pump can be influenced by a number of factors other than those discussed above Th
191. ice good housekeeping Do not permit dust to collect on walls floors sills ledges machinery or equipment Maintain clean and fit test respirators in accordance with OSHA regulations Maintain and test ventilation and dust collection equipment Wash or vacuum clothing which has become dusty Product becomes slippery when wet Avoid breathing dust Avoid contact with eyes Use only with adequate ventilation SECTION VIII EXPOSURE CONTROLS PERSONAL PROTECTION EXPOSURE LIMITS INGREDIENT PEL OSHA TLV ACGIH SILICA CRYSTALLINE QUARTZ CAS NO 14808 60 7 0 1 mg m 0 1 mg m Respirable dust Respirable dust ALUMINUM SILICATE CAS NO 12141 46 7 15 mg m as Al 10 mg m as Al dust dust 5 mg m as A1 respirable fraction 166 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 5 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 Unless otherwise noted all values are reported as 8 hour Time Weighted Averages TWAs and total dust particulates only All ACGIH TLVs refer to the 1992 93 Standards All OSHA PELs refer to 29 CFR Part 1910 Air Contaminants Final Rule January 19 1989 NOTE As a result of the July 7 1992 decision by the U S Circuit Court of Appeals AFL CIO v OSHA to vacate the 1989 PELs OSHA will no longer enforce these new limits and will return to the pre 1989 PELs Engelhard however will continue to list the more protective 1989 levels RESPIRATORY PROTECTION A NIOSH MSH
192. icroprocessor based circuitry specialized knowledge and instru mentation are required for troubleshooting The Isco service department has trained technicians and specially designed equipment necessary for timely efficient repair of the sampler If you wish to attempt repairs the Isco Customer Service Depart ment is available to provide advice on servicing Processor Servicing Servicing microprocessor controlled circuitry is difficult when you do not understand the program that controls it com pletely especially when there is no way to be cer tain that the microprocessor is functioning properly When you attempt to isolate problems within the unit assume that the CPU and memory are working properly until you have eliminated the possible causes listed in Preliminary Electronics Troubleshooting Steps 122 Servicing Removal of the Control Box If there is a problem with the sampler that requires you to ship your unit back to the factory it is often easiest to return only the control box for repair To remove the control box from the sampler 1 Disconnect the power source from the control box 2 Separate the center section from the sampler following the procedure described in Assembly and Disassembly of the Case in Chapter 2 3 Remove the suction tube from the pump and turn the center section over as shown in Figure 35 4 Unscrew the distributor arm retaining nut indi cated in Figure 35 and pull the arm off the
193. idental over filling of the composite container Feed the 34 5 inch 88 5 cm composite pump tube supplied with the optional float and float cage through the port in the center section Then place it in the float cage tube guide as shown in Figure 26 and install it in the pump as described in Installing a New Pump Tube Chapter 6 Standard Sample Bottle Tub You can collect composite samples in the 3700 Standard s sample bottle base equipped with either a 2 5 gallon glass or polyethylene plastic container or by inserting either type of container in the 3700 Compact s base These containers are available as options for the samplers If you intend to use the 2 5 gallon com posite sample containers in the standard sample bottle tub you must have the standard base com posite bottle locating deck with the 3700 Standard Installing the Deck in the 3700 Standard Prepare the standard bottle base by first removing the retaining ring and sample bottles Then place the locating deck open side down in the bottom of the sample bottle tub The locating deck has two recessed areas the deeper recess locates the glass container the shallower recess locates the plastic bottle Finally place the desired sample container on the locating deck and re assemble the sampler Optional Composite Tub The 3700 Standard has two sizes of composite con tainers 2 5 gallon and 4 gallon The 2 5 gallon containers are used with the sequenti
194. ies Time spent in the manhole should be kept to a minimum 3 Adverse Atmosphere Refer to Table 3 Before you enter a manhole tests should be made for explosive atmosphere presence of hydrogen sulfide and oxygen deficiency Since combustible or toxic vapors may be heavier than air the tests on the atmosphere must be run at least 3 4 of the way down the manhole Whenever adverse atmosphere is encountered forced ventilation must be used to create safe con ditions After the ventilating equipment has been operated for a few minutes the atmosphere in the manhole should be retested before anyone enters the manhole When explosive conditions are encountered the ventilating blower should be placed upwind to pre vent igniting any gas that is emerging from the opening When a gasoline engine blower is used it must be located so that exhaust fumes cannot enter the manhole If testing equipment is not available the manhole should be assumed to contain an unsafe atmo sphere and forced ventilation must be provided It should never be assumed that a manhole is safe just because there is no odor or the manhole has been entered previously 4 Entering Manholes Since the top of the man hole is usually flush with the surrounding surface there may not be anything for the person who is entering the manhole to grab on to steady himself Persons who are entering manholes should not be permitted to carry anything in their h
195. igh percentage of suspended solids If the liquid is relatively free of sol ids the inspections can be less frequent The Tubing Life configure option reports the number of pump counts elapsed during the life of the pump tube The amount of tubing 13 5 inches used in the pump is less than half of the total length of the 116 pump tube 42 inches In some cases when the tube has not been damaged to the point of leaking the tube can be used twice by simply turning it around The black bands used to assist you in correctly posi tioning the tubing in the pump and detector are placed on one end only If you turn the tubing around you be unable to use the bands for reference Removing the Pump Tubing To remove the tubing 1 Disconnect power from the unit 2 Separate the center section from the remainder of the sampler as described in Assembly and Disassembly of the Case Chapter 2 and turn the center section over as shown in Figure 30 3 Unscrew the distributor arm retaining nut indi cated in Figure 30 and pull the arm off the dis tributor shaft Do not manually rotate the distributor arm A CAUTION Do not attempt to manually rotate the distributor arm Severe damage to the distributor drive mechanism may result 4 Pull the pump tube out of the distributor arm and coil spring assembly 5 Turn the center section back over and pull the tube out of the pump tube port indicated in Fig ure 30 6 Detach the
196. ill be collected 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Calculation of Sample Volume To calculate the volume of each individual sample the volume of the composite sample container being used and the total number of samples to be collected calcu lated above must be known The individual sam ple volume is calculated by simply dividing the volume of the composite sample container being used by the total number of samples to be col lected For example assume that a 2 5 gallon 9 400 ml plastic container is being used and that a total of 50 samples are to be collected in it The individual sample volume is then calculated 9400 ml 50 samples 188 ml Sample Volume Considerations Thus a sam ple volume of 188 ml will result in the desired composite sample Because of the basic uncer tainty of the delivered sample volume exactly matching the programmed nominal sample volume and the 10 ml sample repeatability it is good prac tice to select a nominal sample volume which is slightly smaller than the calculated sample vol ume This is to prevent overfilling of the sample container In the example an individual nominal sample volume of 125 ml might be a prudent choice For critical applications calibration of the sample volume can be used It is important to select an individual sample volume which will not result in an overfilled sample container under worst case conditions 161 The nominal volume of the composite sample
197. in a flow stream Flow paced sampling requires a flow meter You can interface the 3700 Sampler with Isco flow meters flow loggers and certain non Isco flow meters The flow meter measures the flow quantity and sends a pulse for every predeter mined flow quantity to the sampler The sampler totalizes the number of pulses received from the flow meter and collects a sample when the total reaches a programmed number Types of Sample Distribution There are two primary types of sample distribution sequential and composite sampling In a sequential sample each bottle receives one sample A sequential sam ple represents a snapshot of the flow stream at a particular point in time Figure 9 shows a diagram of sequential sample distribution In a composite sample the individual samples are combined composited into a sin gle container A composite sample represents an average of the characteristics of the flow stream over the total elapsed time of sampling Figure 9 Sequential Sample Distribution Bottle Number 8 of 24 Bottles Shown 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sample Event Number 21 Note The 3700 Sampler is fully programmable for both sequential and composite sampling however in addition to programming the sampler for com posite sampling you must convert the 3700 Standard sampler mechanically for single bottle
198. ing a flow meter connect cable to the flow meter connector located on the rear of the sampler Your sampler has an additional connector labeled PRINTER used to connect the sampler to an Isco Field Printer Isco Field Computer or laptop com puter Note Both the flow meter connector and the printer connector use the same 6 pin configu ration The printer cable connector accepts both the connector from the field printer and a cable from a field computer or a laptop computer run ning the SAMPLINK software 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Isco Flow Meters and Flow Loggers You can purchase cables to connect the 3700 sam plers to an Isco flow meter or logger Refer to the Accessories List in the back of this manual for details To make the connection attach the appro priate cable connector to the flow meter according to directions in the flow meter in instruction man ual attach the other connector to the 6 pin flow meter connector on the rear of the sampler NOTE If a connect cable is not attached to the flow meter or print connectors be sure that the protective covers are tightly fastened in place Figure 27 6 pin Connector Diagram Master Slave Out 412 BRE Printer Source Transmit Receive 112 Non Isco Flow Meters Certain non Isco flow meters can be directly inter faced with the 3700 Series These are flow meters with an isolated contact closure type output of at leas
199. ing stops and resumes 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Each of these extended features is discussed briefly below You may find it helpful to refer to Figures 17 18 and 19 which chart the program sequence in the extended mode Extended Mode Sample Pacing In the extended programming mode the Sample Pacing section allows you to select flow pacing or one of two types of time pacing uniform or nonuni form If you select uniform time intervals the set tings for time intervals are identical to the time intervals entered in the basic programming mode Nonuniform times allow you to pace the sampler at irregular intervals Before you enter nonuniform time intervals you must specify either minutes or clock times in the Nonuniform Times configure option You can enter nonuniform intervals in two ways The first method allows you to define the interval between each sample event in minutes For example you can program the sampler to take sample 2 after an interval of 10 minutes sample 3 after an interval of 30 minutes sample 4 after an interval of 60 minutes and so on Sample 1 would be taken at the start time The second method allows you to enter a specific time and date for each sample event For example with nonuni form time pacing you can collect samples at spe cific times and dates at irregular intervals 6 AM on April 15 noon on April 15 7 AM on April 16 and 1 PM on April 16 If you have several sequences of
200. ing to the pro gram sequence and set the number of sampling retries should the suction line become clogged The option uses four input displays Each display is dis cussed below Enable Disable Detector Isco recommends set ting the Enable Disable Detector option to ENABLE The 3700 Sampler determines the delivered sample volume suction head by counting revolutions of the peristaltic pump rotor The vol ume of liquid delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor is a function of the suction head as the suction head increases the volume delivered by one revolution of the pump rotor decreases By enabling the detector the sampler can accu rately determine the operating suction head It does not have to rely on a programmed suction head value but can instead begin its volume deliv ery count when it detects liquid This minimizes inaccuracies that can occur in changing head con ditions or when it is difficult to measure the suc tion head accurately 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The disable option is provided should the detector or its associated circuitry become suspect If you dis able the detector the manual suction head setting Display 70 is automatically added to the Sample Volume program section in the program sequence If the detector is disabled the sampler uses a calcu lated number of pump counts based on the suction head entry to deliver the correct sample volume With the detector disabled t
201. ion line when the peristaltic pump reverses to purge the line and minimizes the pos sibility of cross contamination When the sampler is used in near freezing temperatures drain the suction line thoroughly to minimize the possibility of frozen liquid clogging the line Strainers The 1 4 and s inch ID vinyl suction lines are shipped from the factory with a polypropylene bod ied weighted inlet strainer installed on the end of the suction line Optional all stainless steel strainers are also avail able for use with the vinyl or Teflon suction lines For sampling from highly acidic flow streams an all plastic strainer is available 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler You can purchase bulk suction line without strain ers Refer to the Accessories List in the back of this manual The strainer prevents solid particles larger than a specific diameter from entering and clogging the suction line Isco recommends its use for bottom sampling or sampling from streams containing large solids The l 4 inch strainers supplied for use with the l 4 inch ID suction line have 1 64 inch 0 56 cm diameter holes The s inch strainers supplied for use with the vinyl or Teflon 9 s inch ID suction line have 7 64 inch 0 9 cm diameter holes Weighted Strainer The use of the weighted strainer is optional When heavy suspended solids are involved and flow stream velocities are signifi cant some field investigation results indicate that
202. ion sys tem contains a switched capacitor low pass filter and two Op Amps A collection of transistors resis tors and diodes are used to control the distributor motor The motor control circuitry connects to the distributor through P6 and can drive the distribu tor in either direction As the distributor moves its position is monitored by an optical device mounted on the distributor assembly IC U20 supplies the necessary current for the optical device An RS 232 serial communications port is con nected to the system at P9 This port is used to out put sampler status program settings and sampling results to a printer or an interrogator IC U21 IC U19 and a handful of discrete components are used to transmit serial information receive serial information and sense the presence of the externally connected device Pump Control Board The pump control board is an integral part of the pump assembly and serves two functions controlling the pump motor and sensing pump revolutions The pump motor control consists of a 2 pole dou ble throw relay K201 and transistor switches Q201 Q202 and Q203 The relay changes the pumping direction and will run the pump in reverse when in the rest state Each time the pump runs the microprocessor sends the pumping direc tion signal through pin 1 of P7 waits for the relay to change state then starts the pump by sending a high signal through pin 3 of P7 By waiting for the relay to chan
203. iquid Level Actu ator Instruction Manual provided with the actua tor for additional information You can use the actuator with an Isco flow meter if you have the Y Connect Cable You must configure the sampler to respond to the actuator Information configuring the sampler for use with the actuator can be found in the discus sion of the Enable Pin configure option section in Chapter 4 Model 583 Field Computer The Model 583 Field Computer is a small durable field interrogator that collects data from Isco s 3700 Series Samplers and 3200 Series Flow Meters It creates data files that are identical to those used by the FLOWLINK software The 583 Field Computer is no longer available from Isco The 583 is bundled with two software programs FIELDCOM resides in the 583 s memory and retrieves stored data from the flow meter or sam pler and converts sampler data into ASCII text files and flow meter data into FLOWLINK compat ible data files called data sets XFER583 runs on a desktop IBM PC compatible and can run as a stand alone program to transfer sampler text files directly to the computer or as a FLOWLINK mod ule that transfers data files to FLOWLINK data directories 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler For more information about the 583 and its soft ware program see the manual for the Model 583 Field Computer and the FIELDCOM and XFER583 User s Manual Figure 28 Type A Interface 114 3700 Standard an
204. irects the sampler to take a sample when disabled and or enabled Enable Pin Basic amp Extended by a Liquid Level Actuator or other Isco flow monitoring equipment Allows you to restart the sampling interval when the sampler is enabled Event Mark Basic amp Extended Allows you to select one of four types of event marks Purge Counts Basic amp Extended Adjusts the number of pre and post sample purge counts Tubing Life Basic amp Extended the pump tubing life information Resets the tubing life Program Lock Basic amp Extended Enables disables the password protection for input displays Sampler ID Basic amp Extended Allows you to enter a 10 character ID number for the sampler Run Diagnostics Basic amp Extended Tests the RAM ROM pump and distributor Allows for reinitializa tion of certain program and configure settings 26 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Configure Sequence The program sequence and the configure sequence are interdependent The selections you make in the configure sequence determine what settings will be available to you in the program sequence When you select the extended programming mode the program sequence is modified to accommodate the extended features by adding one or more input displays The extended programming mode not only extends the number of features available in the program sequence it extends the number of configure options When you select extended programming for
205. is display appears when you have selected YES in Display 35 Select BOTTLES PER SAMPLE if you want the sampler to perform bottles per sample multiplexing Select SAMPLES PER BOTTLE if you want the sampler to perform samples per bottle multiplexing BOTTLES PER SAMPLE Display 36 SAMPLES PER BOTTLE This display appears only in the extended programming mode when you have set the number of bottles per sample event to 1 in Display 30 Select TIME if you want the bottles to be switched after a specified period of time Select SAMPLES if you want the bottles to be switched after a specified number of samples have been placed in a bottle We recommend using SAMPLES for time paced sampling routines CHANGE BOTTLES BASED Display 20 ON TIME SAMPLES This display appears when the number of bottles per sample event is set to a number greater than one and less than half the number of bottles in the tub Select TIME to switch bottle sets after a specified period of time Select SAMPLES BTL to switch bottle sets after a specified number of samples have been placed in a set of bottles Isco recommends using SAMPLES BTL for time paced sampling routines CHANGE SETS BASED Display 41 ON TIME SAMPLES BTL This display appears if you select TIME in Display 40 Enter the amount of time each bottle is to receive samples CHANGE BOTTLES EVERY Display
206. is message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE Step 26 18 10 35 42 SAMPLES 25 JUN 92 Standby State A sampler in the standby state is waiting for your instructions From standby you can start or resume a sampling program access the program or configure sequences take manual samples and use the display status key to review program set tings or the results of a sampling routine A sampler in standby uses a number of displays to communicate its status Some of these displays are associated with the function of a specific key other displays are used to notify you that a sampling program is done halted or has encountered a problem The standby state displays and valid keys are discussed in the following sections Standby Display When you first turn the sam pler on the sampler wakes up in the standby state The standby display illustration a simply informs you that the sampler is in standby and reports the current time and date STANDBY 10 37 23 16 JUN 91 100 At this point the following keys are operable ON OFF PUMP REVERSE PUMP FORWARD START SAM PLING ENTER PROGRAM MANUAL SAMPLE NEXT BOTTLE and DISPLAY STATUS Program Halted A sampling program can be halted with either the STOP or EXIT PROGRAM key if this occurs the sampler will display the halt mes sage
207. istributor arm on the distributor shaft and screw in the distributor arm retaining nut Be sure that the retaining nut is tight 11 Inspect the length of exposed tube under the center section There should be no excessive slack in this tube it should continuously slope downward from the bottom of the center section to the point where it enters the distributor arm This prevents low spots in the tube which might not completely drain of sample liquid If there is 9 119 excessive slack adjust the length of the tubing under the center section by pulling tube out of the pump tube port 12 Reset the pump tube count to zero Refer to the discussion of the Tubing Life configure option in Chapter 4 Replacement of Suction Line It is wise to replace the suction line when it becomes worn cut contaminated or otherwise damaged Inspect the line periodically for damage In critical sampling you may need to replace the suction line between sampling programs to avoid cross contamination When site conditions change you will need to replace the suction line with a dif ferent diameter or type of line vinyl or Teflon Replacement Vinyl Line Isco offers two forms of replacement vinyl suction lines First a com plete suction line with weighted strainer and tube coupling is available in 10 foot and 25 foot lengths for each of the l 4inch and s inch ID Inside Diameter vinyl suction lines Second bulk suction line in the 4 inch ID
208. l ume accuracy Display 242 Sampling Retries The Sampling Retries option is available when the detector is enabled It sets the number of times from 0 to 3 the sampler will try to detect liquid in the line before skipping the sample You can use this option when sampling liq uid with a high concentration of solids that tend to clog the suction line or the strainer The sampler will also retry the rinse cycle when you are using the Sampling Retry option Display 243 Programming Mode The Programming Mode option allows you to spec ify either basic or extended programming mode The basic programming mode is used for conven tional routines you can use the extended program ming mode for either conventional or more complex routines Storm programming is available through the extended programming mode Table 6 summarizes the sampling features accord ing to the programming mode in the program sequence Table 4 in the section Interactive State summarizes the features available in the configure sequence Display 250 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table 6 Sampling capabilities through the Program Sequence Pacing Mode Feature Time Pacing Basic amp Extended Samples taken at regular time intervals from 1 minute to 99 Uniform Time Intervals hours 59 minutes Time Pacing Samples taken at irregular time intervals by specifying the time Nonuniform Clock
209. l dis regard the start time delay The sampler will use the start time delay setting when you do not enter the start time in the program sequence When using a start time delay of greater than 0 take care when the sampler is being inhibited by another sampler a flow meter or a Liquid Level Actuator Enable Pin The Enable Pin option allows you to program the sampler s response to a device controlling pin F of the flow meter connector for example a 3200 or 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Logger or the Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator There are four Enable Pin setup options Sample Upon Dis able Sample Upon Enable Reset Sample Interval and Inhibit Countdown The sampler disregards 58 the Enable Pin configure option settings when run ning a storm routine Each of these options is dis cussed below Sample Upon Disable When you are using a flow meter or Liquid Level Actuator SAMPLE UPON DISABLE allows you to direct the sam pler to take a sample as soon as you disable the sampler through pin F A response of YES causes the sampler to take a sample when the pin is disabled a response of NO prevents the sampler from taking a sample Display 321 The sampler determines an enable or disable con dition by monitoring the voltage on pin F It inter prets high voltage as an enable signal and low voltage or ground as a disable signal Sample Upon Enable When you are using a flow meter
210. lab take it into the field and place it into operation To start the sam pling program press the start sampling key located on the control panel Sample Recovery The sampler will automati cally cease operation after all bottles have been filled or after the programmed number of samples have been placed in the composite container or composite sampling has been stopped by the float shut off When the sampling routine has finished the display will read DONE Recovering the Sampler When you recover the sampler keep it level to prevent spilling the col lected samples If you must return the entire sam pler to the laboratory or office disconnect the cable from the flow meter if used You can turn off the sampler but this is not necessary Separate the base section from the center section as described previously and install caps on the bottles The sampler is now ready to transport 13 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Exchanging Sampler Tubs If you do not need to return the entire 3700 Standard sampler to the lab you can exchange the full base section for an empty one by separating the base from the center section and installing an empty tub After the full base has been removed place caps on the bottles Using the base section as a carrying case is conve nient prevents undue warming of cooled samples and helps to prevent mix ups in bottle order An optional cover with carrying handles for the base s
211. le Event Cycle and Delivery of Sample Volumes The steps listed below describe a typical sequential sample event in order to help you determine the correct sequence of events in the cycle Should you suspect a malfunction in the delivery of the sample volumes you can use this information to help determine the point at which the problem occurs 1 2 A sample event is initiated The distributor rotates to the position of the next sample bottle to be filled The pump rotates in the reverse direction to air purge the suction line inlet of any accumulated debris The pump direction changes pumping in the forward direction to fill the suction line After the suction line has been filled to the pump inlet the sample volume measuring por tion of the sampling cycle begins The pump rotates in the forward direction until the sample volume has been delivered The pump direction again changes pumping in reverse to air purge the suction line to avoid cross contamination of samples The pump then shuts off The sampler waits until another sample event is initiated and the cycle begins again at Step 1 This process continues until the last bottle has been filled at which time the sampler automati cally shuts off The following section briefly describes the method by which the sample volume is determined The 3700 uses a peristaltic pump to transport the sam ple from the source to the sample bottle When compared with ot
212. ler for flow paced sampling The second function provides disable inhibit or enable signals to the sampler A sampler receiving a disable signal will suspend the sampling routine until it receives an enable signal 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler The sampler will disregard a disable signal it receives from a flow meter during the delay to start time If the sampler is disabled when the start time occurs it will suspend the routine until it is enabled Once enabled the sampler will begin the time or flow intervals The sampler will initiate a sample event when enabled for all time paced routines For flow paced routines it will initiate a sample event when the sampler is configured to take a sample upon enable in the Enable Pin con figure option If the sampler is enabled when the start time occurs it will begin the routine The sampler will initiate a sample event at the start time for all time paced routines It will initiate a sample event at the start time for flow paced routines when con figured for sample at start time in the Flow Mode configure option Refer to Figure 21 The diagram shows the sampler s response when enabled or dis abled at the start time for most basic and extended mode routines Figure 22 diagrams the sequence of events preced ing a routine programmed for nonuniform clock times Nonuniform clock time programming allows you to enter a specific time and date for each sample Table 9 Start Time
213. low Logger to enable or disable the sampler according to the level or flow rate of the flow stream or to specific amount of rainfall Use a maximum flow interval setting to termi nate a STORM routine that uses flow paced sampling The maximum flow interval setting affects rou tines that fill the second bottle group with flow paced samples The maximum flow interval set ting limits the amount of time between flow paced sample events For example if the flow rate declines so that the amount of time between flow paced sample events exceeds a maximum flow interval setting of two hours the sampler will terminate the routine when more than two hours elapses between events The maximum flow interval setting allows the sampler to terminate the routine when the flow rate falls below an acceptable rate or drops off completely This limits the sampling routine to one storm event so that samples from multiple storm events are not deposited into the bottle groups Storm Sampling Checklist This section provides two checklists a list of sug gested storm monitoring equipment and a brief installation checklist Notes on terminating a rou tine manual sampling during a storm routine and a storm routine s run state displays follow the checklist Example 17 contains a STORM pro gramming example 73 You can find additional information about storm monitoring installations in the Isco Storm Water Runoff Monitoring Pocket Guide The pocket
214. ls from non Isco flow meters to acceptable flow pulses Figure 29 Master Slave Connections Using samplers in master slave configuration operates samplers in pairs while one sampler per forms a sampling routine the other sampler awatits a command to begin sampling Installing two samplers as master and slave near manholes allows you to double the sampling capacity thereby reducing the number of visits to the manhole You must connect the samplers with the 3700 Mas ter Slave to Flow Meter Cable Attach the cable to the flow meter connector on both samplers You must configure both samplers in the master slave mode Enabling the master slave mode is discussed in following sections 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler While the master sampler is performing a sam pling routine it sends an inhibit signal out on pin D The slave sampler receiving the signal on pin F remains dormant until the master sampler com pletes its routine At this point the sampler reverses roles The master slave inhibit signal out put and the bottle number output for event marks both use pin D When two samplers are connected as master and slave the master slave inhibit sig nal replaces the bottle number output When the master slave pair connects to a flow meter with the Master Slave to Flow Meter Cable the inhibit signal will be sent to both the slave sampler and the flow meter Since this signal does not vary as it would if it were a bottle n
215. me arrives the sampler begins to count flow pulses This display indicates the bot tles that will receive sample volumes at the upcoming sample event If the bottle set consisted of four bottles the first line of the display would read BOTTLES 1 to 4 The second line displays the number of flow pulses remaining until the sample event BOTTLES 1 2 Step 15 AFTER 10 PULSES The second line of the display changes as each flow pulse is received BOTTLES 1 2 Step 16 AFTER 9 PULSES Step 17 This display shows one pulse remaining until the sample event BOTTLES 1 2 Step 18 AFTER 1 PULSES When the sampler receives the tenth pulse the first line reports the current bottle number Step 19 BOTTLE 1 When the pump begins to run forward to deliver the sample volume the second line appears After the pump completes the sample delivery it reverses to purge the liquid from the pump tube past the liquid detector The suction line is not completely purged instead the liquid is pumped just past the liquid detector At the end of the pump tube purge the distributor moves to the next bottle of the set The display remains unchanged until the distributor relocates to the next bottle of the set BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 500 ml 44 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler When the distributor relocates above the next bottle the bottle number reported in the display changes t
216. me of liquid is delivered to the sample bottle In this man ual the amount of liquid delivered to the bottle is referred to as the sample volume 6 The pump direction changes pumping in the reverse direction for the post sample purge Like the pre sample purge the post sample purge air purges the suction line After the post sample purge the pump shuts off 7 The sample interval resets and the cycle resumes at Step 1 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Types of Samples The 3700 Sampler is principally designed to collect sequential discrete samples However you can program it to collect a number of other types of samples As Chapter 1 notes the 3700 Sampler has two programming modes basic and extended The basic programming mode is used for conven tional routines which include the types of sam pling described in this section The section Types of Sampling Available through the Extended Pro gramming Mode discusses this in detail You can characterize sample types by sample distri bution and sample pacing Sample distribution is the order in which samples are placed in the bottles Sample pacing is the interval between samples Types of Sample Pacing There are two types of sample pacing time pacing and flow pacing In time paced sampling the interval between sam ples is a time interval In flow paced sampling the interval between samples is a certain volume of liquid that has passed a measuring point
217. ments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 and 40 CFR Part 372 OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES ODS This product neither contains nor is manufactured with an ozone depleting substance subject to the labelling requiremehe Clean VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS VOC Not Determined 169 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 8 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 US STATE REGULATIONS CALIFORNIA The State of California has a regulation Proposition 65 which identifies specific chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or birth defects Proposition 65 requires a disclosure for products sold within the State of California containing an identified chemical The following information is required by the State of California for this product This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND CARB Not Determined CANADIAN REGULATIONS DSL NDSL DSL WHMIS Classification Class D Division 2 Subdivision A EUROPEAN REGULATIONS EINECS Yes OTHER REGULATIONS MITI Yes AICS Yes SECTION XVI OTHER INFORMATION REVISIONS Revision Number 10 This MSDS has been revised in the following section s SECTION II COMPOSITION INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS SECTION VIII EXPOSURE CONTROLS PERSONAL PROTECTION SECTION IX PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES SECTION XV REGULATORY INFORMATION PREPARATION INFORMATION Prepared By Corpo
218. mes settings In the basic pro gramming mode you will be asked if you want to enter a start time for the routine If you select YES you will be prompted to enter a specific start time and date If you select NO the sam pler will use the start time delay The start time delay can be set from 0 to 9 999 minutes in the Start Time Delay configure option When you select NO the routine will start according to the delay setting in the Start Time Delay config ure option The time remaining between the time you press the start sampling key and the next full minute will pass before the delay countdown begins In other words with a start time delay of one minute if you press the start sampling key at 10 05 30 the routine will begin the 1 minute countdown at 10 05 00 and start the routine at 10 06 00 When the sampler is operating under factory configuration settings and running a time paced program the 3700 will take the first sample at the start time for time paced sampling This is true whether you enter a specific start time and date or if you use the start time delay 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler For flow paced sampling however the flow pulse countdown will begin at the start time and the first sample will be taken when the count down reaches zero Refer to the discussion on the Flow Mode option in the Nonuniform Time section for additional information 7 The sampler automatically returns to standb
219. mily Clay Mineral Chemical Names amp Synonyms Montmorillonite Clay Mineral Smectite Clay Mineral Bentonite Calcium Aluminosilicate Formula Ca x AL xMgx Si 0 OH nH 0 NFPA HMIS HEALTH 0 FIRE 0 REACTIVITY 0 SPECIFIC HAZARD SEE SECTION X SECTION HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Hazardous Components in the Solid Mixture COMPONENT CAS No OSHA PEI ACGCIH TLV Montmorillonite Clay Mineral 1302 78 9 gt 99 3 3 Respirable Dust 5 0 mg m 5 0 mg m Silicon dioxide 14808 60 7 lt 1 Crystalline Quartz 3 3 Respirable Dust 0 1 mg m 0 1 mg m INGREDIENT HAZARD STATEMENT Risk of cancer depends on duration and level of exposure This product contains less or equal to 1 crystalline quartz CAS 14808 60 7 The quartz contained in the material is in granular form and packed in bags for use as a desiccant Therefore no exposure to quartz dust is anticipated under normal use of this product Avoid inhaling desiccant dust Prolonged or repeated exposure may cause lung injury Unless otherwise noted all values are reported as 8 hour Time Weighted Averages TWA s and total dust particulates only All ACGIH TLV s refer to the 1989 90 Standards All OSHA PEL s refer to CFR Part 1910 Air Contaminants Final Rule January 19 1989 Updated April 4 1994 Page 1 172 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET DESI PAK Packaged Desiccant SECTION PHYSICAL DATA Appearance and Odor Gray granul
220. minate the routine MAX FLOW INTERVAL OF Display 110 HOURS MINUTES This display appears when a routine is halted and you press the start sampling key Select START to start the sampling program at the beginning RESUME to continue the sampling program at the point at which it was halted CHANGE START TIME Display 142 YES NO This display appears when you have started a routine after the programmed first switch time Select YES to enter a new switch time Selecting NO will switch one bottle set and start the routine immediately CHANGE SWITCH TIME Display 143 YES NO This display appears after you press the display status key Select REVIEW to view the summary of the cur rent program settings and for sampling results Select PRINT to send the current status program settings and sampling results to an Isco Field Printer The printed results include data for sample events completed when you pressed the display status key REVIEW PRINT PROGRAM Display 148 INFORMATION This display appears after you select Print in Display 148 Select NO to return to standby Select Set tings to print the settings report Select RESULTS to print the results report PRINT PROGRAM NO Display 149 SETTINGS RESULTS This display appears after you select REVIEW in Display 148 Select NO to return to the
221. mples Display 95 ENTER FIRST SWITCH Yes I No TIME YES NO Ge One Bottle Per Sample C More Than One Bottle Per Sample NA Display 46 Display 47 1 FIRST BOTTLE CHANGE FIRST SET CHANGE AT AT HH MM DD MM _ HH MM DD MM Display 100 1 STOP or RESUME TIMES 1 24 J Display 101 1 STOP SAMPLING AT 1 HH MM DD MM Display 102 es Se RESUME SAMPLING AT 1 HH MM DD MM PROGRAMM NG SEQUENCE Storm YT COMPLETE 67 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 19 Extended Programming Mode STORM Programming First Bottle Group PROGRAM CONFIGURE C Configure 7 TIME MODE SAMPLER n FIRST BOTTLE GROUP Display 15 Program gt MINUTE DELAY TO i FIRST GROUP SAMPLE Display 12 Display 23 TIME FLOW STORM Storm TAKE TIMED PACED SAMPLING SAMPLE EVENTS 1 MAX Display 24 SAMPLE INTERVALS OF MINUTES 1 999 Display 30 __ BOTTLES PER SAMPLE EVENT 1 MAX Display 31 __ SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 1 MAX Display 50 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF ml EACH 10 MAX Second Bottle Group AVAILABLE Display 14 TIME FLOW SECOND B
222. n head and sampler calibration 32 When entering the sample volume keep in mind the 10 ml sample volume repeatability Because the entered volume is a nominal value it is prudent to calculate a total sample volume that is somewhat less than the volumet ric capacity of the bottle as a safety factor This will minimize the effects of cumulative error Refer to the section Bottles and Sizes for notes on cumulative error and bottle size If you are using bottles per sample multiplexing to add preservatives to consecutive samples be sure to consider the volume of the preservative into account Suction Head You can configure the sampler through the Liquid Detector configure option to add the suction head setting to the program sequence The suction head display will appear after you enter the sample volume However when the head is unknown or variable omit the suction head setting by disabling that setting in the Liquid Detector configure option By dis abling the setting you allow the liquid detector to determine the operating suction head each time a sample is taken Calibration Settings If you want to calibrate the sample volume you must enable the calibra tion option To enable this option select ENABLE in the Calibrate Sampler configure option Enabling the option will add the calibra tion displays to the Sample Volume Program section The calibration displays are shown in Example 7 Enter the Key Ti
223. n step 6 of Example 21 shows the sample event number the bottle s used and the source of the sample event Source refers to the programmed or configured setting that initi ated the sample event For example the sampler will report TIME as a source if the sample was taken as one of the program s time paced samples Nine sources are tracked and reported Time The sample event was one of the program s time paced samples Flow The sample event was one of the program s flow paced samples Start The sample event was initiated at the pro gram s start time Resume The sample event was initiated to com pensate for a missed sample which should have occurred while the sampler was halted If more than one sample event was missed only one sam ple will be taken Power The sample event was initiated to com pensate for a missed sample which should have occurred while the sampler was without power If more than one sample was missed only one sam ple will be taken Enable The sample event was initiated when the sampler became enabled by a device connected to pin F of the flow meter connector generally a 3200 or 4200 Series Flow Meter a 4100 Series Flow Log ger or Liquid Level Actuator This source is also reported when the sample was initiated at a pro grammed resume time Two different configure option settings control this event the Sample Upon Enable setting in the Enable Pin configure option and the S
224. nabled at the start time The acceptable range of values for the delay to first group sample is 0 to 999 minutes If the delay is 0 the sampler will take the first sample when enabled by the flow meter Subsequent time paced samples will occur at the time interval entered in Display 23 How to allocate bottles to the bottle groups Use the next three displays to determine the both the sample distribution and the number of bottles allocated to the bottle groups TAKE 2 TIMED Suavis SAMPLE EVENTS 1 MAX 3 BOTTLES SAMPLE EVENT 1 Display 30 1 SAMPLES PER BOTTLE 1 Display 31 A bottle group can contain one or more bottles You can allocate all bottles but one to the first bottle group The STORM routine will automatically allo cate the remaining bottles or bottle to the second bottle group It obtains the total number of bottles from the bottle number setting in the bottles and sizes configure option Refer to the displays above a 24 bottle sampler programmed to distribute sam ples to three bottles at two sample events would allocate six bottles to the first bottle group The remaining 18 bottles to the second bottle group Sample distribution and sample volumes for the first and second bottle groups STORM sampling supports sequential sampling as well as all three types of multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing samples per bottle multiplexing and mul
225. nd good safety proce dures are prescribed in various publications on this subject It is essential that people know and use correct procedures It is less important to know just what the hazard ous components of sewer atmospheres are as safety 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler precautions should in general be broadly applicable but there should be a reasonable understanding of this subject It is disturbing to see statements in print that do not reflect true conditions One of the most common errors is the assumption that people have died from a lack of oxygen The human body is able to function very well with sub stantially reduced oxygen concentrations No one worries about going to Santa Fe New Mexico ele vation 2 100 meters where the partial pressure of oxygen is equal to 16 2 a normal atmosphere is about 21 oxygen When first going there a per son may experience a little shortness of breath following exercise People in good health are not afraid to drive over the high passes in the Rocky Mountains At Loveland Pass oxygen pressure is 13 2 of a normal atmosphere At the top of Mt Whitney oxygen is equal to 12 2 Many hikers go there and to higher peaks as well After adequate acclimation they may climb to the top of Mt Ever est where oxygen is equal to only 6 7 The lowest oxygen concentrations that I have observed in a sewer atmosphere was 13 It was in a sealed chamber near sea level u
226. nded Mode Sample Distribution 65 Extended Mode Sample Volumes 65 Extended Mode Key 65 Start Times oe eee en 69 Storm 73 Storm Sampling Checklist 73 Programming the Sampler for a Storm Routine 76 Programming 80 Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Measure 81 Standby State 100 Display Status resevis yene re eee 104 Source of Sample Event 106 Error Messages and Missed Samples 106 Rum States lg eic beans SUBE CHEN 107 Chapter 5 Options and Interfacing Equipment 110 Introduction serii syisa a cece eee 110 Standard Sample Bottle 110 Optional Composite Tub 110 Programming and Configuring the Controller for Composite Sampling 111 Connections to External Devices 111 Isco Flow Meters and Flow Loggers 112 Non Isco Flow 112 Interface 112 Master Slave Connections 112 Model 1640 Liquid Level Actuator 113 Model 583 Field Computer 113 Chapter 6 Routine Maintenance 115 Introduction 115 Cleaning the 1 115
227. ndicates that the relative humidity inside the control box exceeds 20 As more mois ture accumulates the areas numbered 30 and 40 will turn light pink or white indicating rela tive humidities of 30 and 40 respectively A CAUTION The control box contains electronic circuitry which may be damaged by static discharge Open the control box only in a static free envi ronment as described in Precautions for Ser vicing CMOS Circuitry Chapter 7 120 If the 30 area of the humidity indicator turns light pink or white open the control unit inspect it for leaks and renew the desiccant To do so unscrew the 10 screws indicated in Figure 33 around the outer rim of the control box bezel and carefully lift the bezel and cover off the control box Inspect the Control Box If there is a leak repair it by referring to the previous section or by returning the control box to the factory The fac tory has specialized equipment to detect leaks and thoroughly test the units after repair Renewing the Desiccant If you do not detect a leak renew the desiccant by removing the bags of desiccant from the control box see Figure 34 Place the bags on top of a sheet of brown on a flat metal sheet You can use a brown grocery bag and a typical cookie sheet Do not stack the bags on top of each other or allow them to touch Place in a vented circulating forced air conventional oven in a well ventilated room Allow two inch
228. ng a single bottle for composite sampling 1 4 12 24 Step 7 BOTTLES Enter the bottle size here Enter 350 for the 350 ml glass bottles 1000 for plastic bottles for example Press the ENTER PROGRAM key If you enter a number that exceeds the maximum standard bottle size 15 000 the message WARNING STANDARD BTL VOLUME EXCEEDED will display for a short time The sampler will then prompt you to confirm the volume entered This prompt is displayed in Step 9 BOTTLE VOLUME IS Step 8 1000 Select YES if you want to use the nonstandard bottle volume Select NO if you want to revise the entry The display shown in step 8 will reappear use it to enter the revised bottle volume Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry and advance to step 10 1001 ml ARE YOU Step 9 SURE YES NO Press the ENTER PROGRAM key at this display to access the Suction Line input displays shown in steps 11 to 13 SELECT OPTION Step 10 SUCTION LINE Select 4 if you are using 14 inch suction line 9 8 if you are using 8 inch suction line Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection If you select ed you will not see the display shown in step 12 instead you will be prompted for the suction line length as shown in step 13 You do not need to specify vinyl line type because only l 4 inch suction line is available SUCTION LINE ID IS
229. ng on the program and configure option settings the sam pling routine may not start at soon as you press the key The Delay to Start Time is the period between the time you press start sampling and the start time for the routine Figure 20 diagrams the sequence of events preceding the start time 69 Figure 20 Simplified Start Time Diagram START SAMPLING START TIME Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay __ Sampling Routine The start time for a routine is either the pro grammed start time or the time at which the delay to start time expires The programmed start time is determined by entries made in Displays 90 91 92 and 93 The delay to start time is deter mined by the entry in Display 310 of the Start Time Delay configure option These input displays are shown in Table 9 and in the charts in Figures 15 17 18 and 19 Note Unless the sampling routine contains a pro grammed start time Displays 91 92 or 93 the sampler will delay the start time according to the amount of time specified in the Start Time Delay configure option A programmed start time entry always overrides any settings made in the Start Time Delay configure option Isco 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers provide two essential func tions for certain sampling applications They send flow pacing signals flow pulses to the sam p
230. ng strap 5 The main circuit board assembly of the 3700 is protected by an aluminum shield To remove this shield unscrew the four screws and the nut shown in Figure 36 and lift off the shield This reveals the main circuit board shown in Figure 37 6 To remove the circuit board assembly from the control box cover unscrew the four hex threaded Figure 35 Removing the Control Box Pump Tube Port stand offs and the Phillips head screw shown in Figure 37 You can now pull the circuit board away from the control box cover 7 To disconnect the circuit board assembly from the cover disconnect the connector shown in Figure 37 The control box can be reassembled by reversing these steps Ensure that you replace all of the hardware and secure the grounding straps Distributor Arm Retaining Nut Remove the control box by unscrewing six screws 123 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 36 Underside of the Control Box Cover Phillips head screw Per TT MUAHANHAMAM Disconnect five connectors Figure 37 Main Circuit Board stand off 1 of 4 Caution Danger of explosion if Lithium battery is incorrectly replaced Replace with same N type Isco 340 5000 00 insuring correct polarity Do not dispose of used Lithium battery in fire 124 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Removal of the Distributor Gear Case Assembly The distributor gear case assembly is located in the lower s
231. nit is on 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 38 Control Box Tray Removal Ground strap screw Figure 39 Distributor Gear Case Removal Ground strap Ground strap Unscrew four screws and the ground straps to remove the distributor gear case 126 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 7 Individual CMOS semiconductors and built up printed circuit boards should always be trans ported in conductive packaging Foil is satisfac tory metallic plastic bags are also available and work well If you purchase replacement compo nents that do not come in marked protective packaging do not use them They may already be destroyed Once assembled and soldered printed circuit boards are easily damaged by improper repair procedures Do not attempt to remove compo nents particularly ICs from printed circuit boards unless you are skilled at this procedure You can locate and change a defective compo nent and the unit may still not work if excessive heat or pressure has broken the foil traces or pulled the cores from holes on the board Contact Customer Service If trouble symp toms persist and you are unable to locate the cause call the Customer Service Department at 800 228 4373 Preliminary Electronics Troubleshooting Steps Isco suggests checking the following possible prob lem areas before attempting to service the micro processor CPU and associated circuitry 1 2 Be sure that the supply voltag
232. nt de pincement Warning Pinch point This symbol warns you that your fingers or hands will sustain serious injury if you place them between the moving parts of the mechanism near this sym bol Disconnect the battery or power supply before removing the pump cover Attention Risque de pincement Ce symbole vous avertit que les mains ou les doigts seront bless s s rieusement si vous les mettez entre les l ments en mouvement du m canisme pr s de ce symbole D connectez la pile ou d branchez l chantilloneur avant de d monter la pompe Warning Avoid hazardous practices If you use this instrument in any way not specified in this manual the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired this will increase your risk of injury Attention viter les usages hasardeux Si vous utilisez cet instrument de toute maniere autre que celles qui sont specifi es dans ce manuel la protection fournie par l instrument peur tre affaiblie cela augmentera votre risque de blessure 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Table of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Manual 1 1 Introduction eee eens 1 3700 Standard Description 1 3700 Compact 2 Programmable 2 Bottle
233. nt of the suction line intake or strainers Connection to a flow meter Placementofsamplerintooperation Recovery of sampler Locking the sampler 3700 Sampler Setup Procedures To place your sampler into operation prepare the base section attach the suction line connect a power source place the sampler at the sampling site place the suction line properly in the liquid source and interface an external flow meter if used with the sampler You can program the sam pler on site or in the office Guidelines for program ming the sampler are in Chapter 4 Assembly and Disassembly of the Case Disassemble the case by separating the cover and base from the center section To remove the cover unlatch the three black rubber draw catches and lift off the cover To gain access to the base section unlatch the three lower stainless steel latches and lift the center section straight up Reassemble the case by reversing this procedure Preparation of the 3700 Standard Base Section The 3700 Standard s sequential base section is sup plied with 24 wide mouth cylindrical glass bottles with a capacity of 350 ml each or 24 wide mouth wedge shaped polypropylene bottles with a capacity of 1 000 ml each Although sets of glass and plastic bottles are interchangeable in the base you cannot mix glass and plastic bottles in the same base The 3700 Standard is shipped from the factory with the sample bottles in place For first time use the
234. nt switched routines and for bottles sets composed of one or more bottles A sampler that has been inhibited while running a time switched routine will advance to the next bot tle or bottle set regardless of the number of time switches that elapse while the sampler is inhibited 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler If the bottle sets were switched every two hours and the sampler has been inhibited for six hours the restarted routine will begin with the next bot tle set The routine may not continue with the bot tle set that would have been used had the sampler not been inhibited Event Mark The Event Mark option configures the sampler to send an event mark to an interfaced flow meter or other equipment The sampler will supply a vari able duration pulse of up to 700 mA at 12 V on pin E of the flow meter connector Four types of signals can be sent a pulse at the beginning of the pre sample purge a pulse at the beginning of forward pumping only acontinuous signal during the entire pump cycle a continuous signal during forward pumping only The event mark includes a signal sent on pin D which is interpreted and recorded by Isco s 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers as the bottle number s for the sam ple event The bottle number signal consists of a number of 100 millisecond 12 volt pulses that equal the bot tle number i e four pulses represent bottle 4 20 pulses represent b
235. nter the correct bottle size so that the sampler can calculate the range of sample vol umes for a given number of samples and prevent overfilling Other options allow you to set the sam plers real time clock calibrate the sampler or enable the password program protection Programming Modes The configure sequence also allows you to select either of the programming modes basic or extended Basic Programming Use the basic program ming mode for conventional sampling routines In the basic programming mode you can take sequen tial or composite samples at uniform time intervals or at flow pulse intervals You can multiplex sam ples if desired both bottles per sample and sam ples per bottle multiplexing are available You can control the start time of the routine by entering a specific time and date or with the adjustable start time delay 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Extended Programming The extended pro gramming mode increases the number of available features making more complex sampling routines possible For example you can use nonuniform time intervals and create an intermittent sam pling schedule with the Stops and Resumes fea ture Although all basic programming features are available in the extended programming mode the less frequently used features have been separated into the extended mode to simplify the program ming process Figure 14 Interactive State Structure Although the basic and extende
236. ntroller provides for manual control of the sampler for example you can run the pump forward with the pump forward key or initiate a manual sample with the manual sample key It governs all automatic sampling according to user selectable program settings CAUTION Dress indicate that the pump produces sound levels in excess of 85db at one meter Prolonged exposure to this sound level could result in hearing loss and re quires the use of protective ear plugs The control panel which has a 40 character alpha numeric Liquid Crystal Display LCD and keypad is located on the top of the control box The 24 posi tion keypad is used to enter program parameters and direct the following controls on off pump reverse pump forward stop the pump start sam pling resume sampling display the operating sta tus and move the distributor arm to the next bottle 3700 Compact Description The 3700 Compact is a modular system that is cus tom configured for the user It includes a universal compact insulated base the inner sleeve with a choice of five bottle configurations the standard 3700 controller and a top cover The external component materials control panel display and keypad are the same as that of the 3700 Portable The 3700 Compact is designed for durability and carrying ease In addition its sturdy latches and handles the base section of the unit has finger grips molded into the plastic to make it easier to carry At its h
237. o indicate the bottle number The message PUMPING 500 ml will remain on the display When the distribu tor reaches the correct position over the second bottle the pump delivers the sample volume When the deliv ery is done the pump reverses to complete the post sample purge BOTTLE 2 Step 21 PUMPING 500 ml At the end of the post sample purge the display changes to indicate the bottle numbers of the next bottle set The display will change as it receives each flow pulse BOTTLE 3 4 Step 22 AFTER 10 PULSES The cycle repeats until the sampling routine is completed Step 23 i When the routine is complete the display indicates the status DONE the number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 12 SAMPLES Step 24 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 Example 6 demonstrates the programming procedures for a composite sampling routine When composite sampling with the 3700 Standard you must convert the unit for single bottle sampling With the 3700 Compact you must install the proper bottle into the base After converting the 3700 Standard check the settings to verify the sampler is configured for composite sampling This example begins with a demonstration of the steps needed to check the Bottles and Sizes con figure option settings The Bottles and Sizes configure settings should indicate that only one bottle is being used Be sure to enter the correct bottle volum
238. o enter program settings Each key s function is listed below DISPLAY STATUS While the sampler is in the standby or run state pressing the display sta tus key allows you to view the program set tings or the sampling results EXIT PROGRAM Pressing the exit program key while in the program sequence will return the sampler to standby If you press the exit program key while in the run state it will halt the program the message PROGRAM HALTED will be displayed CLEAR ENTRY When entering a number use the clear entry key to return to the original entry ENTER PROGRAM Press the enter program key while in the standby state to cause the sam pler to enter the interactive state While at an input display press the enter program key to accept an entered value or a blinking option and direct the sampler to proceed to the next step Numeric Keys The numeric keys consist of 10 digit keys a left arrow key and a right arrow key You use the digit keys to enter quantities and the arrow keys to move through the configure option list or program options Left Arrow Press the left arrow key to select one of two or more program options displayed when the sampler is in the interactive state When more than one numeric entry is dis played for example the hours and minutes of a time setting you can use the left arrow to step back to a previously entered value When entering a number use the left arrow to erase
239. o start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you want to start the routine with another bottle enter the starting bottle number here START SAMPLING Step 15 AT BOTTLE 1 1 23 89 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display appears after you press the START SAMPLING key to start the routine The scheduled start time is reported on the first line The second line reports the current time and date START FLOW COUNT AT 10 39 Step 16 19 06 JUN This display alternates with the display illustrated below The first line indicates the sample event number and the bottle numbers of the current bottle set The second line is used to indicate the number of flow pulses remaining until the sample event is initiated SAMPLE 1 BTLS 1 2 Step 17 AFTER 1000 PULSES This display indicates the time and date of the next bottle set change NEXT SET CHANGE AT 12 00 19 JUN This display appears when the sample event is initiated It reports the sample number and the receiving bot tle number on the first line during the pre sample purge Step 19 SAMPLE 1 BOTTLE 1 When the pump begins to run forward to deliver the sample the second line appears it reports the sample volume SAMPLE 1 BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 100 ml When the sample delivery has been completed for the first bottle of the set
240. of crystalline silica quartz Inhalation of crystalline silica in the respirable range in excess of the TLV may result in an increase in the risk of serious respiratory disease Avoid breathing the dust Use NIOSH MSHA approved respirators when the TLV for crystalline silica may be exceeded Updated April 4 1994 Page 2 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET DESI PAK Packaged Desiccant Crystalline silica is listed by the International Agency for Research on Cancer IARC as a 2A sufficient evidence in laboratory animals and limited evidence of carcinogenicity in humans CARCINOGENICITY NTP NO IARC YES OSHA NO First Aid Inhalation Remove to fresh air immediately If breathing has stopped give artificial respiration Keep affected person warm and at rest Get medical attention immediately First Aid Ingestion If large amounts have been ingested give emetics to cause vomiting Stomach siphon may be applied as well Milk and fatty acids should be avoided Get medical attention immediately First Aid Eyes Wash eyes immediately and carefully for 30 minutes with _ running water lifting upper and lower eyelids occasionally Get prompt medical attention First Aid Skin To avoid repeated or prolonged contact with this chemical use good hygienic practices Wash with soap and a large amount of water Get medical attention if irritation or inflammation develops SECTION VI REACTIVITY DAT
241. om pact is 16 pounds For maximum cooling fill the base with bottles in place as well as the 3700 Standard s retaining ring with water and freeze the base and contents Insulation Both the center section and the base section have double walled construction with poly urethane foam insulation The insulation on both portable models has a standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 Attaching the Suction Line The suction line is the piece of tubing that extends from the sampler s pump tubing intake at the top of the liquid detector to the liquid source There are three standard suction lines available plasti cized vinyl tubing in M inch 0 64 cm or 38 inch 0 94 cm inside diameters IDs or FEP Teflon with a polyethylene cover in 9s inch ID The poly ethylene cover over the 0 02 inch 0 051 cm wall Teflon line prevents the Teflon liner from kinking or collapsing in service and protects it from dam age The vinyl suction line contains a very low PPM parts per million level of phenols If this affects your samples use the Teflon suction line You can cut both vinyl and Teflon lines to any length from 3 to 99 feet in 1 foot increments Cut the suction line in whole foot increments lengths of 4 feet not 3 5 feet The controller will accept only whole numbers as suction line lengths To ensure the accuracy of the sampler you must enter a suction line length equal that of the actual line measurement When programming
242. on Hazards Section 4 Reactivity Hazard Data STABILITY Conditions i Moisture clay will adsorb moisture amp Stable To Avoid Ounstable Incompatibility Materials to Avoid i Carbon dioxide carbon monoxide water Decomposition Products i HAZARDOUS POLYMERIZATION Conditions i None Occur To Avoid i D3Will Not Occur 176 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Page 2 Section 5 Health Hazard Data PRIMARY ROUTES Minhalation Rlingestion CARCINOGEN LINTP LJOSHA OF ENTRY 69 Skin Absorption _ C Not Hazardous LISTED IN LJIARC Monograph Not Listed HEALTH HAZARDS Acute May cause eye skin and mucous membrane irritation Chronic 1 Prolonged inhalation may cause lung damage Eye Contact i Flush with water for at least 15 minutes Skin Contact Wash affected area with soap and water inhalation Remove affected person to fresh air Ingestion i No adverse effects expected Section 6 Control and Protective Measures Respiratory Protection Specify Type i Protective Gloves Light cotton gloves Eye Protection Safety glasses VENTILATION L Local Exhaust _ Mechanical General ee er TO BE USED LI Other Specify None i Use NIOSH approved dust respirator Other Protective 1 None Clothing and Equipment Hygienic Work i Avoid raising dust Avoid contact with skin eyes and clothing Practices Section 7 Precautions for Safe Handling and
243. on to help you enter the sample distribu tion scheme and sample volumes for the second bottle group If the remaining number of bottles or the capacity is not satisfactory reprogram the first section Pacing for the Second Bottle Group The next display Display 14 allows you to select time or flow pacing for the second bottle group TIME FLOW SECOND BOTTLE GRouP Display 14 Depending on your selection the STORM sequence will follow one of the two paths shown for the sec ond section in Figure 17 or 18 Time Pacing When you select TIME from Dis play 14 two time pacing displays 17 and 24 will follow MINUTE DELAY TO Display 17 SECOND GROUP SAMPLES SAMPLE INTERVAL OF Display 24 MINUTE 1 9999 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Use Display 17 to set the delay to the second bot tle group Like the delay to the first group sample the delay to the second group sample determines the period between the time the sampler is enabled and the first sample is deposited in the second bot tle group You can use this setting to fill the second bottle group during the same time the sampler fills the first bottle group or after the sampler fills the first bottle group Figure 24 shows a time diagram for a STORM routine that uses time pacing for both the first and second bottle groups To fill the second bottle group after the first be sure amount of time you
244. one month beyond the current date The start time delay is the period between the time you press the start sampling key and the time the routine actually starts You can adjust it from 0 zero to 9 999 minutes Other features are available Program storage allows you to store as many as three separate pro grams eliminating the need to reprogram the sam pler for recurrent sampling routines A program lock prevents unauthorized program alterations When the lock is enabled users must enter a pass word before they can change any program settings although they can view the programed settings at any time Foreign Languages and Metric Units of Mea sure The 3700 Series samplers provide displays in French German and Spanish Additionally the software supports entries in metric units of mea sure Samplers using French and German lan guage displays support metric units for suction line and suction head measurements Metric units include volumes in milliliters suction head and suction line length in decimeters and suction line inside diameter ID in millimeters Samplers with English displays support either English or metric units for suction line and suc tion head measurements Sample volume units are always entered in milliliters regardless of the selected language Delivery System The 3700 Series uses a peri staltic pump for sample collection The sample is under pumped flow at all times there are no metering chambers
245. ones markers warning signs and barricades a vehicle or a heavy piece of equipment should be placed between the working area and oncoming traffic Flashing warning signals should be used to alert drivers and pedestrians Orange safety vests should be worn by personnel stationed at the surface when the manhole is located in a vehicular traffic area 6 Falling Object All loose items should be kept away from the manhole opening This applies to hand tools as well as stones gravel and other objects 7 Removing the Covers Manhole covers should be removed with a properly designed hook Use of a pick ax screwdriver or small pry bar may result in injury A suitable tool be made from 3 4 inch round or hex stock Two inches of one end should be bent at a right angle and the other end should be formed into a D handle wide enough to accommodate both hands Even with this tool care must be exercised to prevent the cover from being dropped on the toes The 2 inch projection should be inserted into one of the holes in the cover the handle grasped with both hands and the cover lifted by straightening the legs which have been slightly bent at the knees 8 Other Precautions Other precautions which should be taken when entering a manhole are 16 Wear a hard hat Wear coveralls or removable outer garment which can be readily removed when the work is completed Wear boots or non sparking safety shoes Wear rubbe
246. or Liquid Level Actuator SAMPLE UPON ENABLE allows you to direct the sampler to take a sample as soon as the sampler is enabled through pin F A response of YES causes the sam pler to take a sample when the pin is enabled A response of NO prevents the sampler from taking a sample when the pin is enabled Display 322 Reset Sample Interval Reset Sample Inter val controls the time or flow pulse countdown If you select YES a full sample interval begins when pin F is enabled If you select NO the interval will not be reset when the sampler is enabled the settings entered in the INHIBIT COUNTDOWN option will be used If you are sampling on a time paced basis and wish to syn chronize all sampling with real time do not reset the sample interval Display 323 Inhibit Countdown INHIBIT COUNT DOWN is only applicable when you respond NO to RESET SAMPLE INTERVAL The Inhibit Countdown option controls the countdown while the sampler is disabled Select YES to freeze the countdown to the next sample The count will resume when the sampler is enabled Select NO to allow the countdown to continue while the sampler is disabled Display 324 A sampler that has been inhibited while running a routine will move to the next bottle set when enabled if at least one sample volume has been deposited in the current bottle set This is true for both time switched and cou
247. or the extended programming mode To verify the programming mode setting press the ENTER PROGRAM key Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 SELECT OPTION lt gt PROGRAMMING MODE Select EXTENDED Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the selection BASIC EXTENDED PROGRAMMING MODE Press the RIGHT ARROW key to skip the Load Stored Program configure option SELECT OPTION lt gt LOAD STORED PROGRAM Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the Save Current Program configure option SELECT OPTION lt gt SAVE CURRENT PROGRAM 56 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Select the number you want to use as the program name Select NONE when you do not want to save a program When the sampler has saved the program it will display the next configure option When you are done configuring the sampler press EXIT PROGRAM to return to Standby Step 9 SAVE PROGRAM AS 1 2 3 NONE When the sampler is properly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program Step 10 10 37 23 STANDBY 19 JUN 91 Flow Mode Sampling The Flow Mode Sampling option directs the sam pler to take a sample at key times in a flow paced sampling program There are two settings The first setting directs the sampler to take a sample at the start time The second directs the sampler to take a sample at the switch times when the bo
248. ottle 20 The type of signal selected from the Event Mark configure option affects the event mark signal on pin E In Figure 16A a pulse signal is sent at the beginning of the pre sample purge In Figure 16B a pulse signal is sent during the sample volume delivery portion of the sample event In Figure 16C a continuous signal is sent during the entire pump cycle In Figure 16D a continuous pulse is sent for the duration of the sample volume delivery Continuous Pulse Signal The Continuous Pulse setting selects either continuous or pulse signals Pulse signals are three seconds in duration continu ous signals are three seconds or longer and depend on the setting and the pump cycle Display 330 Continuous Signal Timing The Pump Cycle Fwd Pumping settings will appear when you have selected CONTINUOUS SIGNAL Select PUMP CYCLE when you want a continuous signal trans mitted during the entire pump cycle from the beginning of the pre sample purge to the end of the post sample purge Select FWD PUMPING when you want a continuous signal transmitted while the pump is delivering a sample volume Display 331 59 Pulse Signal The Pulse Signal setting will appear when you select PULSE Two options are available The first option PURGE sends a pulse at the beginning of the pre sample purge The sec ond option FWD PUMPING sends a pulse at the beginning of the sample delivery when the pump is
249. ously in field repair situations such precautions are impractical However you must avoid certain extreme hazards 1 Never perform any work in a room with a car peted floor 2 Always roll up the sleeves of work clothes so that your arms are in contact with the working surface Avoid using a work surface made of an extremely good insulator Avoid laminated counter tops and glass which are good insula tors A metal surface is best a wood surface is acceptable Conductive grounding mats are availalble for workstations and are worthwhile if you have a considerable amount of repair to do The degree of hazard depends on the relative humidity Be particularly careful if the work area is extremely dry or if the work is being done in the winter when indoor forced heating and outdoor low temperatures cause the relative humidity level to be very low Keep yourself grounded when handling disas sembled equipment When you arrive at the work area after a unit has been opened for repair make an effort to always touch the metal chassis before touching any of the circuit compo nents Be especially careful handling the CMOS inte grated circuits when removing them from the rest of the circuitry Being connected to the rest of the circuitry provides some protection Most of the circuitry is well protected from damage caused by static discharge when the unit is pow ered up However an IC should never be replaced when the u
250. outer case of the liquid detector by loosening the two captive thumbscrews as shown in Figure 31 Pull the tubing away from the detector 7 Remove the outer pump lid by loosening the four captive thumbscrews indicated in Figure 31 This will expose the pump tubing which is squeezed between the pump rollers and the curved surface of the inner pump lid as shown in Figure 32 8 Extract the tubing from the pump The pump rollers can be rotated manually to facilitate the removal of the tubing After the tubing is removed clean the interior of the pump case thoroughly 9 Remove the suction line if attached as described in the section Replacement of Suction Line 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 30 Interior of 3700 standard center section Removing the Pump Tube Distributor arm located at bottle 1 Distributor Arm Retaining Nut 117 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 31 Liquid Detector and Pump Case Liquid Detector Captive Thumbscrews Pump Case Figure 32 Interior of Liquid Detector and Pump Tube Pump Rotor Machine Screw Pump Shaft Locate bands here to correctly place tubing 118 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Installing a New Pump Tube To install a new pump tube follow the steps listed below 1 The pump tube is marked with two black bands These bands are used to correctly locate the tub ing in the detector and pump Correct placement is critical to prolonging
251. ow or nonuniform time modes of sample pacing Select YES to sample continuously Select NO to stop the sampling routine after the last set of bottles has been filled SAMPLE CONTINUOUSLY Display 48 YES NO Enter the size of the sample volume MAX will vary according to the number of samples per bottle and bottle size SAMPLE VOLUMES OF Displ 20 ml EACH 10 MAX This display appears when you have configured the controller for composite sampling by selecting 1 in Dis play 221 or 222 Enter the number of composite samples An entry of 0 instructs the sampler to take sam ples until a float shut off terminates the sampling routine COMPOSITE Display 60 SAMPLES 0 MAX This display appears when you select YES in Display 242 or select DISABLE in Display 240 Enter the measured suction head MAX will be the smaller of the suction line length or 20 SUCTION HEAD OF FEET 1 MAX This display appears in the program sequence when you have selected ENABLE in Display 290 Select YES to use the calibration sequence NO to omit the calibration sequence CALIBRATE SAMPLE Display 80 VOLUME YES NO 153 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler This display is part of the calibration sequence Press the MANUAL SAMPLE key when a collection bottle is underneath the distributor and the
252. p will run until you press the stop key PUMP REVERSE While in the standby state pressing the pump reverse key will run the pump continuously in reverse The pump will run until you press the stop key STOP The stop key will stop the pump any time it is running When you press the stop key in the run state the sampling routine will halt the sampler will transfer to the standby state and the PROGRAM HALTED message will be displayed Pressing the stop key while in the interactive state will access the display s reference number START SAMPLING When in the standby state pressing the start sampling key will begin the sampling program When entering a sampler ID the key will type a space 28 RESUME SAMPLING When PROGRAM HALTED is displayed pressing the resume sampling key will cause the sampler to con tinue with the current sample program at the point were it was halted When entering a sampler ID the key will type a period MANUAL SAMPLE Pressing the manual sam ple key will allow you to take a manual sample The manual sample key is valid in the standby state the run state and when calibrating the sampler When entering a sampler ID the key will type a dash NEXT BOTTLE Pressing the next bottle key will cause the distributor to move to the next bottle If the distributor is positioned over the last bottle it will move to bottle position 1 Program Keys The four program keys are used t
253. play 11 Enter the uniform time interval You need to make 2 entries The first entry sets the hours the second sets the minutes SAMPLE EVERY Display 21 HOURS MINUTES This display follows Display 10 when you have selected FLOW Enter the flow pulse interval SAMPLE EVERY Display 22 PULSES 1 9999 This display follows Display 15 Use this display to enter the number of timed sample events in a storm program TAKE TIMED Display 23 SAMPLE EVENTS 1 MAX This display follows Display 23 Enter the time interval between time paced sample events in a storm program SAMPLE INTERVALS OF Display 24 MINUTES 1 99 This display follows Display 20 when you select YES to modify the nonuniform time interval sequence Enter the number of sample events to occur at nonuniform time intervals MAX varies according to the bottle size entered in Display 223 TAKE SAMPLES Display 25 1 MAX This display follows Display 25 Enter the nonuniform clock times and dates for each sample event TAKE SAMPLES AT Display 26 1 HH MM DD MMM 151 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Enter the number of samples to be taken at each interval The total quantity you enter will be 1 fewer than the total number of samples because the first sample taken at the start time counts as 1 For example if you want to take 19 samples the first
254. pler Enter 1000 to set the pulse interval to 1000 pulses SAMPLE EVERY 1000 PULSES 1 9999 Enter 2 to set the bottles per sample event to 2 Each bottle set will consist of two bottles 2 BOTTLES PER Step 5 SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Select TIME CHANGE SETS BASED Step 6 ON TIME SAMPLES BTL Enter 2 to switch bottle sets every two hours Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to advance to the minutes entry CHANGE SETS EVERY Step 2 HOURSO MINUTES Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept an entry of 0 for minutes CHANGE SETS EVERY Step 8 2 HOURSO MINUTES Enter 100 to set the sample volume at 100 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES oe 100 EACH 10 330 Select NO ENTER START TIME Select YES Sapa ENTER FIRST SWITCH TIME NO Enter the time at which you want the sampler to move to the second bottle set At the first bottle set change 12 00 the bottle set changes will be placed on schedule FIRST SET CHANGE AT Step 12 12 00 19 06 JUN After this message is displayed briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 13 COMPLETE When the sampler has been correctly installed press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 14 10 37 23 19 JUN 91 T
255. pler REFER TO LODED VIEW 77 REFER TO EXPLODED VIEW 1 OF 2 24 1 OF 4 78 23 R Z gt REFER TO 3 EXPLODED VIEW 27 gt l S 7 19 sS m c PUMP TUBING ASSEMBLY oT AI REFER TO ASSEMBLED VIEW 3 20 n 60 3703 268 REV D 140 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 268 REVISION D SHEET 2 OF 8 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION 10 13 15 16 7 18 19 2 2 2 2 2 2 77 141 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 58 29 OF 2 CI 60 3703 268 D REV 142 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 268 REVISION D SHEET 4 OF 8 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION 143 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 50 60 3703 268 REV D 144 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 268 REVISION D SHEET 6 OF 8 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBER NUMBER DESCRIPTION a7 4 57 60 3703 260 STANDOFF 6 32 X 25 HEX X 1 500 LONG ALUMINUM 145 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 60 3103 268 REV D 146 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler RE
256. polyethyl ene foam lined caps 12 Bottle Configuration 950 ml 1 quart glass with Teflon lined caps requires 12 bottle base 950 ml 1 quart polypropylene with polyethyl ene foam lined caps requires 12 bottle base 4 Bottle Configuration e 3800 ml 1 gallon glass with Teflon lined caps requires 4 bottle locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section Single Bottle Composite Configurations e 9400 ml 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle with unlined cap requires locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section 9400 ml 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap requires locating insert for 24 bottle standard base section e 15 000 ml 4 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap With the 3700 Compact the removable inner sleeve holds any of five different bottle configura tions They are 24 Bottle Configuration 500 ml polyethylene bottles with polyethylene foam lined caps 12 Bottle Configurations 300 ml glass bottles with Teflon lined caps 300 ml polypropylene bottles with polyethyl ene foam lined caps Single Bottle Composite Configurations 9400 liter 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle with unlined cap 9400 liter 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle with unlined cap Power Options The sampler is powered by a 12 VDC power source either a rechargeable nickel cadmium battery a lead acid rechargeable battery or an AC powered 12 VDC regulated s
257. ppermost in their minds at all times When working above ground rules of common sense and safety prevail However when entering manholes strict safety procedures must be observed Failure to do so could jeopardize not only your own life but also the lives of other crew members 1 Hazards There are many hazards connected with entering manholes Some of the most common hazards are Adverse Atmosphere The manhole may contain flammable or poisonous gases or the atmosphere may be deficient in oxygen Forced ventilation may be necessary Deteriorated Rungs Manhole steps may be cor roded and not strong enough to support a man It may be difficult to inspect the rungs because of poor lighting 15 Traffic Whenever manholes are located in the trav eled way barricades and warning devices are essen tial to direct traffic away from an open manhole Falling Object Items placed near the manhole opening may fall and injure a worker in the manhole Sharp Edges Sharp edges of items in or near a manhole may cause cuts or bruises Lifting Injuries Unless proper tools are used to remove manhole covers back injuries or injuries to hands or feet may result 2 Planning Advance planning should include arrangements for test equipment tools ventilating equipment protective clothing traffic warning devices ladders safety harness and adequate number of personnel Hasty actions may result in serious injur
258. previous operat ing state Select SETTINGS to view the summary of the current program settings Select RESULTS to view the sampling results for sample events completed at the time you pressed the display status key REVIEW PROGRAM NO Display 150 SETTINGS RESULTS Display 151 is used to identify the displays used to summarize the current program settings which appear when you select SETTINGS in Display 150 Display 151 SETTINGS DISPLAYS Display 152 identifies sampling results displays that appear when you select RESULTS in Display 150 Display 152 RESULTS DISPLAYS Display 200 is used to identify the displays which locate each configure option in the configure sequence Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the input displays for each option Use the LEFT ARROW and the RIGHT ARROW keys to move through the options SELECT OPTION lt gt Display 200 name of configure option 155 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Set Clock configure option Enter the time and date to set the controller s clock Use military time Enter two digits each for the day DD month MM and year YY HH MM DD MM YY Display 210 HH MM DD MM YY Bottles and Sizes configure option Select PORTABLE when you are using a 3700 Compact or Standard Sampler Select REFRIG only if you have a refrigerated base unit PORTABLE REFRIG Display 220 SAMPLER
259. pstream from an inverted siphon on a metropolitan trunk A man would be foolish to enter the chamber Without ven tilation he might die but not from lack of oxygen It seems unlikely that anyone has ever died in a sewer from suffocation that is a lack of oxygen Deaths have often been attributed to asphyxia tion This is a word which according to the dictio nary is used to mean death from an atmosphere that does not support life The word has sometimes been misinterpreted as meaning suffocation which is only one kind of asphyxiation In nearly all cases of death in sewers the real killer is hydrogen sulfide It is important that this fact be recognized Many cities diligently test for explosive gases which is very important and they may measure the oxygen concentration which usu ally is unimportant but they rarely measure HS Death has occurred where it is unlikely that there was any measurable reduction in the oxygen con centration Wastewater containing 2 mg l of dis solved sulfide and at a pH of 7 0 can produce in a chamber with high turbulence a concentration of 300 ppm 25 in the air This is considered to be a lethal concentration Many people have died from H38 not only in sewers and industries but also from swamps and from hot springs In one resort area at least five persons died from H5S poisoning before the people were ready to admit that H S is not a therapeutic agent Hardly a year passes in the
260. ption Select ENABLE to add the Sampling Stop Resume settings to the program sequence Select DISABLE to omit the settings ENABLE DISABLE Display 300 SAMPLING STOP RESUME 157 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Sampling Stop Resume configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Select YES to take a sample at stop times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the stop times SAMPLE AT STOP Display 301 NO Sampling Stop Resume configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 300 Select YES to take a sample at the resume times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the resume times SAMPLE AT RESUME Display 302 NO Start Time Delay configure option Enter the amount of time in minutes you want to delay the start time This entry affects programs that do not have a programmed start time MINUTE DELAY Display 310 TO START 0 9999 Enable Pin configure option Select YES to take a sample at the time the sampler becomes disabled Select NO if you do not want a sample event when the sampler becomes disabled SAMPLE UPON DISABLE Display 321 YES NO Enable Pin configure option Select YES to take a sample when the sampler becomes enabled i e ceases to receive an inhibit signal f
261. pump tube in the peristaltic pump and a distribution tube routing the sample liquid from the pump out let to the sample bottle The pump tube consists of a single 42 inch 103 8 cm piece of medical grade Silastic silicone rubber tubing Isco uses medical grade tubing because of its superior mechanical properties and because it does not contain any organic materials Nonmedi cal grade silicone rubber tubing can contain organic vulcanizing agents During vulcanizing these agents are converted into compounds which can leach into the sample The medical grade sili cone tubing Isco supplies for use with the 3700 Sampler will not contribute any organic material to the sample A CAUTION Be sure the power is disconnected from the unit before you exchange the pump tubing The pump is extremely powerful If the sampler activates the pump while you are manipulating the tubing within the pump you may be seriously injured Inspection of Pump Tubing The pump tubing is extremely durable However the constant mechanical strain placed on the tubing by the peri staltic action of the pump eventually causes the tubing to fatigue and fail Remove the cover period ically to inspect the pump tubing for wear inside the pump Check the tubing for cracks where the pump roller compresses the tubing Replace the worn out pump tubing with a new pump tube if necessary The inspections should be fairly frequent when the liquid being sampled contains a h
262. r No Liquid Detected The sampler was unable to take the sample because no liquid was detected Sampler Shut Off The sampler was unable to take the sample because it was halted with the on oFF key during the sample event Run State A sampler in the run state is executing the sam pler s instructions according to the settings you ve entered in the program and configure sequences To start a sampling program and place the sampler into the run state press the start sampling key While running the sampling program the sampler will present several displays that allow you to monitor the sampler s progress The displays are listed with a brief explanation in Examples 22 23 and 24 If you encounter a problem while running a sam pling routine that results in missed samples an asterisk will appear in the lower right corner of the display as illustrated below BOTTLE 11 AT 6 00 5 42 33 There is one condition under which the sampler will enter the run state after the start sampling key is pressed but will not begin the sampling pro gram If the sampler is interfaced with a flow meter liquid level actuator or other equipment capable of transmitting an inhibit signal the sam pler will not begin the program until the inhibit signal is suspended The sampler will use the fol lowing display to inform you that the sampler is inhibited SAMPLER INHIBITED 10 32 19 JUN Sampler Inhibited Display
263. r changing the pump tube select YES to reset the pump counter to zero Select NO to leave the counter unchanged POST SAMPLE Display 351 COUNTS 0 9999 Tubing Life configure option Enter the number of pump counts required to trigger the pump count warning if the factory setting is not suitable This value is set to 500 000 when the controller is reinitialized PUMP COUNTS Display 352 TO WARNING Program Lock configure option Select ENABLE to turn on the program lock If you enable the program lock input displays are protected by a pass number 3700 The controller will not allow you to make any changes to a program or configure sequence setting until you enter the pass number when requested Select DISABLE to turn the program lock off ENABLE DISABLE Display 360 PROGRAM LOCK Sampler ID configure option Enter the sampler identification here The sampler will accept as many as 10 charac ters including periods press resume sampling dashes press manual sample and spaces press start sampling SAMPLER ID NUMBER IS Display 365 Run Diagnostics configure option Select YES to run the distributor test Select NO to skip the test Test the distributor by moving it to Position 24 then back to Position 1 TEST DISTRIBUTOR Display 370 NO Run Diagnostics configure option Select YES to reinitiali
264. r safety equipment supplier SECTION IX STORAGE PRECAUTIONS Store in a dry well ventilated place below 115 degrees F away from a heat source Keep in tightly closed container Protect container from physical damage Always reseal container and protective moisture barrier liner after use SECTION X HMIS Hazardous Materials Identification System for this product is as follows Health Hazard 0 Flammability 0 Reactivity 0 Personal Protection HMIS assigns choice of personal protective equipment to the customer as the raw material supplier is unfamiliar with the condition of use The information contained herein is based upon data considered true and accurate However United Desiccants makes no warranties expressed or implied as to the accuracy or adequacy of the information contained herein or the results to be obtained from the use thereof This information is offered solely for the user s consideration investigation and verification Since the use and conditions of use of this information and the material described herein are not within the control of United Desiccants United Desiccants assumes no responsibility for injury to the user or third persons The material described herein is sold only pursuant to United Desiccants Terms and Conditions of Sale including those limiting warranties and remedies contained therein It is the responsibility of the user to determine whether any use of the data and information is
265. ram started later than programmed start time era ere RA OR 102 19 Program started later than programmed first switch 102 20 Program started later than programmed stop ime calde d ethos Bes 103 21 Reviewing the sampling results 105 22 Run State Displays Time paced sampling 107 23 Run State Displays Flow paced sampling 108 24 Run State Displays Composite sampling 109 iii 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler iv 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 1 Introduction Manual Organization This manual explains the features of Isco s 3700 Portable Samplers the 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact and includes instructions for operation programming and maintenance Chapter 1 contains a summary of the samplers capabilities and features It notes key accessories Table 1 lists the technical specifications for the 3700 Standard and Table 2 lists the specifications for the 3700 Compact Chapter 2 tells how to install the sampler Chapter 3 covers important safety consider ations for those who must install a sampler in haz ardous environments Chapter 4 details how to program your Standard or Compact sampler The chapter includes sections that summarize keypad functions programming features basic sequential and composite program ming routines setup options and more sophisti cated programming routines
266. rate Environment Health amp Safety Group Phone Number See Section I The information in this Material Safety Data Sheet should be provided to all who will use handle store transport or otherwise be exposed to this product This information has been prepared for the guidance of plant engineering operations and management and for persons working 170 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ENGELHARD Page 9 Code J96001 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Date 23 DEC 1993 with or handling this product The information presented in the MSDS is premised upon proper handling and anticipated uses and is for the material without chemical additions alterations We believe this information to be reliable and up to date as of the date of publication but make no warranty that it is Additionally if this Material Safety Data Sheet is more than three years old please contact the supplier at the phone number listed in Section I to make certain that this sheet is current Copyright Engelhard Corporation License granted to make unlimited copies for internal use only End of MSDS 171 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler UNITED DESICCANTS United Catalysts Inc 101 Christine Drive Desiccants Division Rio Grande Industrial Park Belen NM 87002 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Telephone 505 864 6691 DESI PAK Fax 505 864 9296 Packaged Desiccant SECTION I PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION Trade Name and Synonyms DESI PAK Chemical Fa
267. rd 223 2 1000 ml 24 glass bottles enter 350 ml Suction Line 230 231 232 Enter correct settings Liquid Detector Liquid Detector 240 Select ENABLE Rinses 241 0 Enter head manually 242 NO of retries 243 0 Programming Mode 250 Select EXTENDED 74 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Configure Option Display No Recommended Setting Load Stored Program 255 Load only a stored STORM program Save Current Program 260 Not applicable Flow Mode Sampling Sample at start time 270 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample at switch times 271 Disregarded by STORM routines Nonuniform Time 280 Disregarded by STORM routines Calibrate Sampler 290 Select DISABLE Sampling Stop resume 300 Sample at stop times 301 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample at resume times 302 Disregarded by STORM routines Start Time Delay 310 Enable Pin Sample upon disable 321 Disregarded by STORM routines Sample upon enable 322 Disregarded by STORM routines Reset sample interval 323 Disregarded by STORM routines Inhibit countdown 324 Disregarded by STORM routines Event Mark Continuous pulse 330 Select preferred Event Mark Pump cycle fwd only 331 Select preferred Event Mark Purge Counts Pre sample counts 340 Enter preferred count Post sample counts 341 Enter preferred count Tubing Life Reset pump counter 351 Reset if required pump counts 352
268. rd Sampler 7 2 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Compact Sam Pleas tue cesset bu on Las 8 3 Hazardous 18 4 Configure Option Functions 26 5 Bottle Volume Settings for Standard Bottle Configurations 51 6 Sampling capabilities through the Program Sequence lv eins See ede uM 53 7 Factory Configure Option settings 62 8 Factory Program settings 63 9 Start Time 1 70 10 Recommended configuration settings for storm 74 11 Flow Meter Connector Wiring 112 12 Printer Connector Wiring 112 13 Display Index cece eee 150 ii List of Tables 1 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Standard bo 7 2 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Compact Sample sieved rms pte eR ede 8 3 Hazardous Gases 18 4 Configure Option 26 5 Bottle Volume Settings for Standard Bottle 51 6 Sampling capabilities through the Program Sequence aT SE HS 53 7 Factory Configure Option settings 62 8 Factory Program 63 9 Start Time 1
269. re option Select ENABLE to turn on the Liquid Detector DISABLE to turn off the Liq uid Detector If you turn off the detector you must enter the suction head Display 70 in the program sequence ENABLE DISABLE Display 240 LIQUID DETECTOR Liquid Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Enter the number of rinse cycles Rinse cycles condition the suction line to reduce cross contamination 156 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Liquid Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Select YES to add the suction head setting Display 70 to the program sequence Select NO to omit the setting ENTER HEAD MANUALLY Display 242 YES NO Liquid Detector configure option This display appears when you select ENABLE in Display 240 Enter the number of retries the number of times the sampler will try to detect the presence of liquid for each sample event RETRY UP TO TIMES Display 243 WHEN SAMPLING 0 3 Programming Mode configure option Select BASIC to use the basic programming mode To use the extended programming mode select EXTENDED BASIC EXTENDED Display 250 PROGRAMMING MODE Load Stored Program configure option Select the sampling program you want to use Select NONE to exit the display
270. receive 900 ml each bottles per sample mul tiplexing At the second timed event bottles 4 through 6 will receive 900 ml each The sampler will fill the second bottle group with flow paced samples during the same time as the second bottle group At each sample event a single bottle in the second bottle group will receive a 400 ml sample Each bottle will receive samples from two sample events samples per bottle multiplexing Example 17 Storm Sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY 10 34 50 12 JUN 92 Step 1 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER Select STORM TIME FLOW STORM Step 3 PACED SAMPLING TIME MODE Step 4 FIRST BOTTLE GROUP Enter 25 to delay the first group sample 25 minutes Acceptable range 25 MINUTE DELAY TO FIRST GROUP SAMPLE Step 5 Enter 2 to take two timed samples TAKE 2 TIMED Penn EVENTS 1 50 Enter 5 to set the time interval between samples to five minutes SAMPLE INTERVALS OF 5 MINUTES 1 999 Step 7 Enter the number of bottles per sample event 3 3BOTTLES PER SAMPLE EVENT 1 23 Step 8 Enter 1 to place one sample in each bottle 1 SAMPLES PER Step 9 BOTTLE 1 2 Enter the sample volume of 900 ml SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 900 10
271. ress ENTER PROGRAM to accept the number 0 and move to the minutes entry shown in step 5 SAMPLE EVERY Step 4 0 HOURS 1 MINUTES Enter 30 to set the minute entry Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the entry SAMPLE EVERY Step 5 0 HOURS 30 MINUTES 36 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler For this example select NO Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry If you select YES in response to this question you can select bottles per sample or samples per bottle multiplexing for your routine MULTIPLEX SAMPLES Step 6 YES Enter the sample volume 250 Press ENTER PROGRAM to accept the entry SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 250ml 10 1000 Because this sampling routine does not require a specific start time use the arrow keys to select NO Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept the entry If you select YES you can enter a specific start time and date for the routine ENTER START TIME Step 8 YES After this message displays briefly the sampler will automatically return to the standby state PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE Step 9 COMPLETE After you properly install the sampler press the START SAMPLING key to run the program STANDBY Step 10 5 42 23 19 JUN 91 To start the sampling routine with the first bottle accept the blinking 1 by pressing the ENTER PROGRAM key If you w
272. retries Select FWD PUMPING ONLY to send the signal when the pump is deliver ing a sample volume only DURING PUMP CYCLE Display 331 FWD PUMPING ONLY 158 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Event Mark configure option This setting appears when you select PULSE in Display 330 Select PURGE to transmit an event mark signal to a flow meter at the beginning of the pre sample purge Select FWD PUMPING to transmit a signal when the pump switches forward to deliver the sample volume AT THE BEGINNING OF Display 332 PURGE FWD PUMPING Purge Counts configure option Enter the number of pre sample pump counts needed to purge the suction line This value is set to 150 when the controller is reinitialized PRE SAMPLE Display 340 COUNTS 0 9999 Purge Counts configure option Enter the number of post sample pump counts needed to purge the suction line The Controller derives the number that initially appears in this display from the suction line ID and length entered in Display 230 and 232 POST SAMPLE Display 341 COUNTS 0 9999 Tubing Life configure option This informational display communicates the pump counts elapsed since the last reset and the counts required to trigger the Pump Tubing Warning Exit this display by pressing any key IE PUMP COUNTS Display on WARNING AT Tubing Life configure option Afte
273. ries ideally suited for general purpose or priority pollutant sampling The 3700 samplers also provide storm paced sampling capabilities designed to meet the EPA requirements for storm water runoff monitoring The newest member of Isco s 3700 Portable family the 3700 Compact is a smaller version of the 3700 Standard It has the same sampling capabilities flexible programming and rugged construction of the larger 3700s but is lightweight A new feature of the 3700 Compact is a removable inner sleeve to hold the bottles Previously users who wanted mul tiple bottle configurations had to purchase different bases with the 3700 Compact they merely remove the inner sleeve and change bottle configurations The entire 3700 family offers a number of very sophisticated features The following sections pro vide an overview of the standard and compact units sampling capabilities and a variety of inter facing equipment The end of this chapter provides a brief discussion of this interfacing equipment which includes sco 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters and 4100 Series Flow Loggers collectively called flow meters throughout this manual for flow weighted sampling and sampler enable control e sco Field Printers that print the sampler s program settings and sampling results Laptop computers that collect store or trans fer the same data from a sampler in the field to a computer in the office Model 583 Field Computer
274. rized or waterproof gloves e Wear a safety harness with a stout rope attached Do not smoke Avoid touching yourself above the collar until you have cleaned your hands 9 Emergencies Every member of the crew should be instructed on procedures to be followed in an emergency Each crew chief must have a list of emergency phone numbers including the nearest hospital and ambulance service police precinct fire station and rescue or general emergency number 10 Field Equipment The following equipment will be available for use Blowers Hard Hats Breathing apparatus Harnesses Coveralls Manhole irons First aid kits Pick axes Emergency flashers Rain slickers Flashlights Ropes Mirrors Safety vests Gas detectors Traffic cones Gas masks Waders Gloves Lethal Atmospheres in Sewers The following is an article written by Dr Richard D Pomeroy and published in the October 1980 issue of Deeds amp Data of the WPCF Dr Pomeroy is particularly well known for his studies over a period of nearly 50 years in the field of the control of hydrogen sulfide and other odors in sewers and treatment plants He has personally worked in a great many functioning sewers In the earlier years he did so he admits with little knowledge of the grave hazards to which he exposed himself Dr Pomeroy writes It is gratifying that the subject of hazards to peo ple working in sewers is receiving much more attention than in past years a
275. rm mon itoring installation 1 Program and install the flow meter Install the rain gauge if used You can program 3200 and 4200 Series Flow Meters for sampler enable control conditions from the flow meter front panel or use FLOW LINK and a computer to download the desired condition The 4100 Series Flow Loggers must be programmed with FLOWLINK Note You can program the sampler to start the routine at an exact time and date with a start time entry You do not need to use a flow meter to enable the sampler 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 2 Program and install the sampler Programming the sampler includes adjusting certain configuration option settings as well as entering the STORM program settings Table 10 lists the configure options and their recom mended STORM settings Connect the flow meter to the sampler with the connect cable Turn the flow meter on Turn the sampler on and start the sampling routine by pressing the start sampling key Connect the flow meter to the sampler and start the flow meter before you press the start sam pling key on the sampler If you are using the flow meter to detect a storm event and enable the sampler when the event occurs the sampler must be disabled by the flow meter when you press the start sampling key If the sampler is not disabled it will begin the routine as soon as you press the key This means that the flow meter must not detect the enable control condi tions
276. rom a flow meter or a Liquid Level Actuator Note No sample will be taken if the enable signal is used to initiate the start time delay countdown Select NO if you do not want a sample event when the sampler becomes enabled SAMPLE UPON ENABLE Display 322 YES NO Enable Pin configure option Select YES to restart the sample interval countdown at the time the sampler is enabled The interval countdown is determined by the setting if NO is selected in Display 324 SAMPLE UPON ENABLE Display 323 NO Enable Pin configure option This display appears if you select NO in Display 323 Select YES to freeze the sample interval when the sampler becomes disabled When the sampler is enabled the interval count down continues from the point where it had stopped Select NO to let the sample interval countdown con tinue while the sampler is disabled INHIBIT COUNTDOWN Display 324 YES NO Event Mark configure option Select CONTINUOUS SIGNAL to send a variable duration event mark signal from pin E of the flow meter connector Select PULSE to send a 3 second event mark signal CONTINUOUS SIGNAL Display 330 PULSE Event Mark configure option This setting appears when you select CONTINUOUS SIGNAL in Display 330 Select PUMP CYCLE to transmit the event mark signal during the entire pump cycle including any programmed rinses and
277. rt and illness but under that condition the explosion hazard would be far more serious The explosimeter tests as well as the sense of smell would warn of the dan ger Pipelines in chemical plants might contain any number of harmful vapors They too are sensed by smell and explosimeter tests if they get into the public sewer Such occurrences are rare The attempt to instill a sense of urgency about real hazards is diluted if a man is told to give attention to a long list of things that in fact are irrelevant Be very careful to avoid high H58 concentrations flammable atmospheres and hazards of physical injuries Remember that much HS may be released by the stirring up of sludge in the bottom of a struc ture Obey your senses in respect to irritating gases such as chlorine unconsciousness comes suddenly from breathing too much Be cautious about strange odors Do not determine percent oxygen in the air There is a danger that the result will influ ence a man s thinking about the seriousness of the real hazards Most important use ample ventila tion and do not enter a potentially hazardous struc ture except in a good safety harness with two men at the top who can lift you out Table 3 Hazardous Gases 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler ver Max Safe Safe Explosive A Simplest and Specific k 3 Likely Location Most Gas Common Physiological 60 Min 8 Hour
278. rtable or Compact configuration Sets the number and size of bottles used in the tub or inner sleeve Sets the type of line vinyl or Teflon line diameter 1 4 or inch Suction Line Basic amp Extended and line length 8 to 99 feet Enables disables liquid detector sets the number of rinse cycles 0 to Liquid Detector Basic amp Extended 3 enables disables the suction head entry and sets the number of sampling retries 0 to 3 Programming Mode Basic amp Extended Sets the programming mode basic or extended Load Stored Extended Loads one of as many as three previously saved sampling programs Program Save Current Extended Saves current sampling program Flow Mode Directs sampler to take a sample at the beginning of a flow paced Extended Sampling program Directs sampler to sample at time switches Nonuniform Time Extended Directs sampler to accept nonuniform intervals as specific clock times or in minutes Calibrate Sampler Basic amp Extended Enables disables the calibration sequence Sampling Extended Enables disables Sampling Stops and Resumes feature Stop Resume Sets the start time delay from 0 to 9999 minutes If no specific start time is entered in the program sequence the program uses the Start Time Delay Basic amp Extended entered start time delay The delay is the amount of time that will elapse after you press the start sampling key or after the sampler is enabled D
279. s A numeric input dis play prompts you for input by blinking the cur rently stored number In the display illustrated in b the number 250 will blink to prompt you to enter a value If the blinking number is accept able you do not need to type the number again pressing the enter program key will store the num ber and advance the program to the next step To enter a new number press the appropriate numeric keys then press the enter program key The sampler will not accept a number that exceeds the allowable range of values placed in parenthe ses on the display In illustration b you cannot enter a value less than 10 ml or greater than 990 ml as a sample volume If an entered number exceeds the range the sampler will emit a series of beeps and the original number will reappear You must enter an acceptable value to advance to the next step Editing Numbers You can use the left arrow and clear entry keys to edit numeric entries if they are used after you press a numeric key and before you press the enter program key The clear entry key will clear any typed number and the original number will reappear The left arrow will erase the most recently typed number Some numeric input displays prompt you to enter more than one value In the illustration below the prompt asks for five numeric entries hours min utes day month and year You can use the left and right arrow keys to move back and forth between each of the fi
280. s delay affects flow paced second bottle groups Like the delay to second group sample the during after delay determines when the sampler begins sampling for the second bottle group Because the flow paced sampling can consume unpredictable amounts of time the storm routine must use two specific events to mark the beginning of the flow intervals These events are the time the sampler is enabled and the time the sam pler completes the first bottle group If you want the sampler to fill the second bottle group during the first bottle group select DUR ING from Display 16 The sampler will begin counting flow pulses when the sampler is enabled If the sampler is enabled at the start time the sampler starts counting flow pulses at the start time If you want the sampler to fill the second group after the sampler fills the first bottle group select AFTER The sampler will begin count ing flow pulses after it fills the first bottle group Programming Examples The following examples demonstrate the steps used to program the sampler for several different sampling routines in the extended programming mode Each programming example concludes with the run state displays that appear for that routine 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 25 Start Time Diagram for STORM Routines START SAMPLING Start Time Delay to Start Time Determined by start time entry or start time delay Disable Si
281. s dis cusses LCD displays and ways you can use the keypad to interact with the sampler Keypad Description Keys are grouped together on the control panel to assist you in identifying related functions Control keys manually control the sampler numeric keys are used to enter program values programming keys are used to monitor the sampler s status and direct programming activities Key names are rep resented by small capital letters in this manual The individual key switches that make up the key pad provide tactile and audible feedback to assure you that the key switch has been successfully actu ated When you press a key switch you can feel the deflection of the spring member in the switch an audio indicator inside the sampler will beep once The sampler has a 10 keystroke buffer which in some cases allows you to type ahead of the display Control Keys Control keys let you turn the sam pler on or off start or resume the currently entered program and control the sampler manually Con trol key functions are ON OFF Pressing the on off key when the sampler is off will turn the sampler on reacti vate the display and place the sampler in the standby state Pressing the on off key when the sampler is on will halt all sampling activ ity and clear the display e PUMP FORWARD While in the standby state pressing the pump forward key will cause the pump to run continuously in the forward direc tion The pum
282. s exceeded the sampler will termi nate the routine 54 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Load Stored Program The Load Stored Program option allows you to load one of as many as three sampling programs that you have previously saved with the Save Current Program configure option After loading a pro gram the sampler will adjust the time settings to current times and dates Check the settings before starting the program to be sure they are appropriate for your application Display 255 Example 8 Load Stored Program The sampler is shipped from the factory with four programs the current program and three stored programs numbered from 1 to 3 All four programs contain the factory default program settings Unless you have previously saved a program under one of the program numbers you will replace the current program with the factory default settings by loading a program When you reinitialize the sampler all four programs return to the default program settings Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state Step 1 STANDBY 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE Step 2 PROGRAM CONFIGURE SAMPLER the Set Clock configure option Press the LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW key to scroll through the configure options The first option displayed is SELECT OPTION lt gt Step 3 SET CLOCK all Step 4 J
283. s extended programming fea ture you can sample only during key periods of the day For example you may wish to sample only during the hours of 6 AM to 8 AM and 5 PM to 7 PM You can enter as many as 12 sampling stops and 12 resumes You can use sampling stops and resumes with both flow and time paced routines and with uniform and nonuniform time intervals Multiplexing In addition to sequential sam pling which places one sample in each bottle the sampler provides three standard types of multi plexed sample distribution samples per bottle multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing and multiple bottle compositing In samples per bottle multiplexing more than one sample volume can be placed in a bottle Samples per bottle multiplexing allows you to collect a series of small composite samples If you deposit several samples in each bottle the contents represent an average of the flow stream during the sampling period In bottles per sample multiplexing you can place equal sample volumes in as many as 24 bottles at each sample event Bot tles per sample multiplexing is ideal for situations where you need identical sets of samples when you need to use more than one preservative for example You can multiplex both time paced and flow paced sequential samples The third type of multiplexing multiple bottle compositing is accessible through the extended programming mode Multiple bottle compositing places more than one
284. s of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 96 SAMPLES Step 23 6 10 35 21 JUN 91 Example 12 shows how to program the sampler to take samples at intervals of 10 pulses Samples will be multiplexed 800 ml sample volumes will be placed into two bottles at each sample event Each bottle is to receive one sample volume The routine will use the start time delay Example 12 Extended flow paced multiplexed bottles per sample sampling Press ENTER PROGRAM to access the interactive state STANDBY Step 1 10 35 23 19 JUN 91 Access the program sequence by selecting PROGRAM PROGRAM CONFIGURE SEPZ SAMPLER Select FLOW TIME FLOW STORM PACED SAMPLING Step 3 Enter 10 to set the pulse interval to 10 pulses SAMPLE EVERY Step 4 10 PULSES 1 9999 Enter 2 to set the number of bottles per sample event to 2 2 BOTTLES PER Step 5 SAMPLE EVENT 1 24 Select SAMPLES BTL CHANGE SETS BASED Step ON TIME SAMPLES BTL 86 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Enter 1 to set the number of samples per bottle to 1 Step 7 CHANGE SETS EVERY 1SAMPLES 1 8 Enter 800 to set the sample volume at 800 ml Step 8 Select NO Step 9 SAMPLE VOLUMES OF 800ml 10 1000 ENTER START TIM
285. s the bottle number which will receive the sample volume Step 23 BOTTLE 1 As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears This message remains through the post sample purge BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 500 ml This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample event is completed It indicates the bottle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the scheduled time for the next event on the left The current time is displayed on the right BOTTLE 2 Step 24 AT6 15 8 01 11 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 25 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 18 SAMPLES Step 26 18 10 35 21 JUN 91 97 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 17 illustrates how to program a 24 bottle sampler to allocate six bottles to the first bottle group used for flow weighted samples The The remaining 18 bottles allocated to the second bottle group will be sampler delays the first group 25 minutes after it is enabled For the first bottle group the sampler will take two samples with a 5 minute interval between each sample event At the first sample event bottles 1 through 3 will each
286. shown in illustration b If you halt the program to take a manual sample or to change a setting in the program or configure sequence the sampler will return to standby If this is the case you will not be able to use the RESUME SAMPLING key PROGRAM HALTED 10 37 33 19 JUN 91 Each operable key is listed and discussed below On off When in the standby state this key sim ply shuts the sampler off 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Pump Forward and Pump Reverse The PUMP FORWARD and PUMP REVERSE keys run the pump forward or in reverse until you interrupt it with the STOP key While the pump is running the mes sage shown in c or d displays depending on the pumping direction PUMPING FORWARD PUMPING REVERSE A CAUTION Tests indicate that the pump produces sound levels in excess of 85db at one meter Prolonged exposure to this sound level could result in hearing loss and re quires the use of protective ear plugs When you press the STOP key the sampler will dis play a message similar to the one shown in e This message indicates the total number of pump counts that occurred while the pump was running This information can be used to set the desired number of purge counts required to purge the suc tion line See the Purge Counts configure option Press any key except STOP and ON OFF to return to the standby display 311 COUNTS FORWARD Manual Sample
287. splayed on the LCD step you through the programming sequence in a logical order indicating the needed value or option For example the sampler will prompt you to enter set tings for the interval between samples select either time paced or flow paced intervals sample volume in ml and other operating controls These settings can be changed at any time The sampler accepts only appropriate values for the program settings and rejects any unacceptable values If you turn off the unit or the power is disconnected the lithium battery retains settings in the sampler s memory Operating States There are three operating states the standby state where the sampler is waiting for your instructions the run state where the sampler is running a sam pling routine and the interactive state which is used to program the sampler Each state serves a different purpose and is discussed separately Standby State In the standby state the sampler is waiting for your instructions From standby you can start a sampling routine placing the sampler in the run state You can also access the interactive state which is discussed in an upcoming section Run State In the run state the sampler is exe cuting the sampling routine and operating under program control While the sampling routine is executed the LCD displays a number of messages communicating the sampler s progress through the routine 24 It reports the current bottle or bottle set c
288. supply voltage of 10 to 13 volts Sample Volume Repeatability 10 ml typical Sample Frequency Selectable from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes in 1 minute incre ments between consecutive samples or from 1 to 9 999 flow pulses in single pulse intervals Enter nonuniform times in minute intervals or clock time Flow Meter Signal Specifications Flow Meter Signal Requirements 5 to 15 volt DC pulse or isolated contact closure of at least 25 ms duration 4 20 mA or pulse duration signal may be converted with optional interface unit Table 2 Technical Specifications of the 3700 Compact Sample Physical Specifications Physical Size Height 27 6 in 70 1 cm Diameter 17 75 in 44 4 cm Weight Range 32 lbs 14 5 kg empty to 62 lbs 28 2 kg with 24 bottles Operational Temperature Range 32 to 120 F 0 to 50 C Storage Temperature Range 0 to 140 F 20 to 60 C Control Box Self Certified NEMA 4X and 6 ratings Submersible watertight dust tight and corrosion resistant Inner Sleeve Bottle Options 1 Sequential Sampling 24 500 ml polypropylene bottles 12 300 ml glass bottles 12 300 ml polypropylene bottles 2 Optional Composite Sampling 2 5 gallon glass composite bottle 2 5 gallon polyethylene composite bottle Base Insulation Standard thermal resistance factor of R 11 Power Specifications Sampler Power Requirement 12
289. t 25 millisecond duration The frequency of the contact closures must be directly proportional to total flow Connect the isolated contact closure from the flow meter to pins A and C of the 6 pin connector Refer to your flow meter s instruction manual for further details Isco offers both a connector and cable clamp to con nect a non Isco flow meter to the 3700 samplers To wire the connector for contact closures use pins A and C To wire the connector for pulses use pin C When the connector appropriately wired attach the non Isco connector to the flow meter connector on the rear of the sampler Isco also offers a connector prewired to a 22 foot 6 7 meter cable that terminates in two wires The black wire is connected to pin A the white wire to pin C Interface Devices The 3700 Sampler can also be used with flow meters having other types of outputs for example a 4 to 20 mA output directly proportional to the flow rate However these flow meters require a special interface device to convert their output sig nal to one compatible with the 3700 sampler Two interfaces are available the Type A Interface and the 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface Consult the factory for assistance in interfacing the sampler with non Isco flow meters Type A Interface Converts flow pulse duration output from non Isco flow meters to acceptable flow pulses Figure 28 4 20 mA Sampler Input Interface Converts 4 to 20 mA output signa
290. t and the current time on the right BOTTLE 1 Step 16 AT 8 00 10 38 07 When start time occurs the sampler will take the first sample Which will begins with a pre sample purge During the purge the display indicates the bottle number which receives the sample volume Step 17 BOTTLE 1 As soon as the pump runs forward to deliver the sample volume the message on the second line appears and remains through the post sample purge BOTTLE 1 PUMPING 500 ml This display appears when the post sample purge from the previous sample is completed It indicates the bot tle number which is to receive the sample at the upcoming sample event The second line displays the sched uled time for the next event on the left The current time is displayed on the right BOTTLE 2 Step 18 AT 8 30 8 01 11 The cycle of displays is repeated for each bottle until the sampling routine is done Step 19 When the routine is completed this message appears It reports the status of the routine DONE the total number of sample events and the current time and date DONE 24 SAMPLES Step 20 8 10 35 21 JUN 91 83 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Example 11 shows how to program the sampler to take time paced samples at uniform time intervals of 15 minutes At each sample event one bottle will receive a sample volume of 75 ml The bottles are to be switched every hour so th
291. tandard and 3700 Compact Sampler Start Time Delay The Start Time Delay option sets the amount of time in minutes between the time you press the start sampling key and the time the sampling rou tine is initiated The sampler s response varies according to specific entries 0 1 and entries greater than 1 MINUTE DELAY TO START 0 9999 Display 310 An entry of 0 eliminates the delay to start time the start time occurs the moment you press start sampling For example if you press start sampling at 10 32 15 the sampler will initiate a time paced sample event at 10 32 15 The sampler will start clocking time intervals at the beginning of the minute HH MM 00 of the first sample event If a sampling routine required 10 minute intervals and you pressed start sam pling at 10 32 15 the sampler would begin the time interval at 10 32 00 It would initiate the sec ond sample event at 10 42 00 The sampler would begin the flow interval at 10 32 15 for flow paced routines If you entered a start time delay of 1 the sampler would begin the routine at the beginning of the next minute Thus if you pressed start sampling at 10 32 15 the sampler would initiate the sample event at 10 33 00 The sampler would begin time and flow intervals at 10 33 00 If you enter a start time delay of 2 the sampler would begin time or flow intervals at 10 34 00 Display 310 Note If you enter a start time the sampler wil
292. te sampling Step 6 4 12 24 BOTTLES Enter the bottle size here 15 000 Table 5 lists the standard Isco bottle sizes Step 7 Press the ENTER PROGRAM key at this Step 8 BOTTLE VOLUME IS 15000 ml display to access the Suction Line input displays SELECT OPTION lt gt SUCTION LINE Select 1 4 if you are using 4 4 inch suction line 98 if you are using inch suction line Step 9 SUCTION LINE ID IS 1 4 3 8 INCH This display appears when you have selected in step 9 Select VINYL if you are using vinyl suction line TEFLON if you are using Teflon suction line Step 10 SUCTION LINE IS VINYL TEFLON Enter the length of the suction line The length should not include the tube coupling or the strainer Step 11 SUCTION LINE LENGTH IS 10 FEET 3 99 To verify the Liquid Detector configure options press the ENTER PROGRAM key Step 12 SELECT OPTION LIQUID DETECTOR Continue to scroll through the configure options with the right arrow key When you have checked the settings for the desired options press the exit program key to return to standby Step 13 l l 46 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to reenter the interactive state Step14 STANDBY 10 38 50 19 JUN 91
293. ter running Isco s SAMPLINK software Flexible Sampling Intervals The 3700s are designed to collect as many as 24 separate sequen tial discrete samples and are fully programmable for true composite sampling You can collect both sequential and composite samples at user defin able time intervals time pacing or at equal flow volume intervals using flow pulse inputs from an external flow meter flow pacing You can set the flow interval from 1 to 9 999 flow pulses Both samplers offer two types of time pacing uni form and nonuniform You can take uniform time paced samples at regular time intervals a sample every 15 minutes for example You can set the interval between samples from 1 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes in 1 minute increments Using the extended programming mode you can specify as many as 999 or bottle volume dependent non uniform time intervals in minutes For example you can program the sampler to take the first six samples at 10 minute intervals then four more samples at 15 minute intervals and so on Users can set nonuniform time intervals from 1 to 999 minutes in 1 minute intervals You can specify 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler nonuniform times in a clock time format by enter ing a time and date for each sample The sampler will accept as many as 99 nonuniform clock times Additionally the Sampling Stop and Resume fea ture allows you to create an intermittent sampling schedule With thi
294. th line diameter type and length so it is important that you enter these settings accurately An incorrect setting will impair the accuracy of the sample volume These settings can also determine the number of post sample purge counts It is important to have suffi cient counts to completely clear the line If you change the current suction line settings the CALCULATING PUMP TABLE VALUES message will appear for a short time Because the volumetric delivery of the sample varies with the diameter type and length of the suction line the sampler must revise the internal pump tables The electronic pump count uses the tables as reference for sample delivery There are three types of suction lines available for use with the 3700 sampler l 4 inch vinyl 9 s inch vinyl and inch Teflon If you specify 14 inch line the sampler will prompt you for the line length 51 immediately If you specify 33 inch line the sampler prompts you to specify vinyl or Teflon before prompt ing for the line length Display s 230 and 231 The sampler will accept suction line lengths of 3 to 99 feet When measuring the line do not include the tube coupling or the strainer in the measure ment The line should be cut to even foot lengths such as 6 not 6 5 feet Display 232 Liquid Detector You can use the Liquid Detector configure option to turn the liquid detector on or off set the number of rinse cycles add a suction head sett
295. the ENTER PROGRAM key PROGRAM CONFIGURE Step 2 SAMPLER The first option displayed is the Set Clock configure option If the time displayed on the LCD in the standby message is not correct reset the time with the Set Clock configure option Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the Set Clock input display SELECT OPTION lt Step 3 SET CLOCK Use this display to reset the time Five entries are required The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys can be used to move back and forth between each of the five entries Use the arrow keys until the entry you want to change blinks Type in the new time or date press the ENTER PROGRAM key to accept it Press the RIGHT ARROW or ENTER PROGRAM key on the last entry to store the values and advance to the next display HH MM DD MM YY BEERS 10 35 20 19 06 91 To verify the Bottles and Sizes settings press the ENTER PROGRAM key The display shown in Step 5 will appear SELECT OPTION lt gt Step 5 BOTTLES AND SIZES Select PORTABLE or REFRIG depending upon which model you have Enter PORTABLE for either the 3700 Standard or Compact PORTABLE REFRIG Step 6 SAMPLER 33 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler For the purposes of this example select 24 when you are using the 24 bottle base Use the arrow keys until 24 blinks then press the ENTER PROGRAM key Select 1 when you are usi
296. the choice between resuming the program and starting the program by presenting the display illustrated in J START RESUME SAMPLING PROGRAM e Select START to start the program from the beginning Select RESUME to resume the pro gram at the point at which it halted If you do not make a selection from this display within 60 sec onds the sampler will automatically select the cur rently blinking response START will reinitialize the display status memory Additional Displays There are three additional displays used in the run state Done The sampler will inform you it has com pleted a program by displaying the message illus trated in k This message is displayed until you press any key at which time the display will return to the standby message DONE 10 37 33 24 SAMPLES 19 JUN 91 Problem Occurred You will be informed that a problem was encountered during the sampling rou tine with the message illustrated in This display will alternate with the DONE display at approxi mately 3 second intervals until you press any key PROBLEM OCCURRED PRESS DISPLAY STATUS Float Weight Tripped 3700 Samplers set up for composite sample use the display below m to notify you that the program finished because the liquid level float float cage was tripped This dis play alternates with the DONE display at approximately 3 second intervals FLOAT WEIGHT
297. the life of the pump tube and to assuring efficient operation and accurate sample volumes Facing the liquid detector place the inner edge of the end band against the upper left inlet of the liquid detector Place the inner band at the lower outlet of the liquid detector Figure 32 shows the correct placement of the tubing at the liquid detector Slip the pump tubing under the rollers so that the pump tubing does not interfere with the installation of the outer pump lid Replace the outer pump lid and tighten the four thumbscrews Recheck the position of the marker bands and adjust the tubing if the position of the tubing has slipped Replace the outer case of the liquid detector and tighten the two thumbscrews M Note For proper operation of the liquid detector it is impor tant that its lid is tightly attached to its base Be sure to tighten the two captive thumbscrews tightly 5 Feed the free end of the tube down through the pump tube port in the center section Turn the center section over again and feed the end of the tube into the coil spring 1 Pull the tube through the coil spring and care fully insert the tube into the body of the distrib utor arm Feed the end of the tube into the outlet of the distributor arm so that the end of the tube is flush to 1 16 inch below the end of the arm Reinstall the suction line as described in Attaching the Suction Line in Chapter 2 10 Reinstall the d
298. the sam pler you must enter the inside diameter type and length of suction line used Cut the line to the shortest length feasible this aids the downhill routing Avoid loops of coiled suction line which may hold residual amounts of liquid that would cross contaminate sample volumes A shorter suction line will also extend battery life and pump tube life because the sampler will require a shorter pumping cycle to deliver the sample volume Attaching the Vinyl Suction Line to the Pump Tubing Attach vinyl suction line to the pump tubing with the tube coupling Two cou plings are available one for each size of vinyl line 11 Each coupling has two color coded nylon clamps attached to the stainless steel ferrule The black clamp secures the pump tube to the coupling The white clamp secures the suction line To attach the line or tubing to the coupling push it onto the appropriate side of the ferrule and tighten the clamp by squeezing the finger pads together To loosen a clamp twist the two sides of the clamp until the teeth disengage Figure 3 Tube Coupler Figure 4 Tubes Connected Attaching the Teflon Suction Line to the Pump Tubing Attach the Teflon line to the pump tubing by inserting the line into the pump tubing and securing it with a suitable clamp Placement of the Suction Line and Intake Route the line from sampler to sampling point so that it is continuously sloped downhill This helps to drain the suct
299. tiple bottle compositing These distribution schemes are available for both bottle groups Because STORM programming is part of the extended programming mode the sample distribu tion displays used Display s 30 and 31 are iden tical to other extended mode programming routines Refer to Example 11 for an example of 78 samples per bottle multiplexing Example 12 for bottles per sample multiplexing and Example 13 for multiple bottle compositing To enter a sample volume for the first bottle group enter the volume in Display 50 Second Section Second bottle group The sec ond section contains input displays for the second bottle group It includes displays that Set the pacing for the second bottle group Determine when the sampler begins filling the second bottle group during the same time period as the first bottle group or after it fills the first bottle group Set the maximum flow interval Determine the sample distribution for the second bottle group samples per bottle multiplexing bottles per sample multiplexing or multiple bot tle compositing After you ve completed the entries for the first bot tle group the sampler will present the following message BOTTLES AVAILABLE This message marks the beginning of the second section It reports the number of bottles allocated for the second bottle group and the total volume of their combined capacity The sampler displays this informati
300. to a single composite sample con tainer Conversion Procedure To prepare your 3700 Standard for composite sampling you must con vert the center section To do so remove the dis tributor arm assembly install a shorter pump tube and install the optional composite shut off float cage assembly With the portable complete the preparation by the adding a composite sample container and locating ring in the standard bottle base or an optional composite base With the com pact remove the inner sleeve and install the proper bottle configuration for composite sampling These are the listed steps needed to convert the 3700 1 Separate the center section from the remainder of the sampler 2 Remove the pump tube and distributor arm from the sampler as described in Removing the Pump Tube Chapter 6 3 Turn the center section over as shown in Fig ure 26 and install the optional float and float cage You should install the shaft on the diving bell float in the hole in the distributor shaft as shown Attach the float cage to the underside of the center section using the four screws and the 1 inch spacers provided with the float cage kit When attaching the cage reuse the existing lock washers Be sure the float cage is oriented with 110 the tube guide positioned as shown in Figure 20 The float and float cage direct the discharge of the sample into the composite container and pro vide a fail safe shut off to prevent acc
301. ts can be changed after a programmed number of sam ples You can use select either TIME SAM PLES or SAMPLE BTL settings with both time and flow paced sampling Extended Mode Sample Volumes The extended mode Sample Volumes section is identical to the basic Sample Volume section Extended Mode Key Times The extended mode Key Times section has two additional sets of displays which allow you to spec ify the time of the first bottle or bottle set change and to set up the sampling stop and resume times First Switch Time The first switch time dis plays will appear only when you have specified bot tle or bottle set changes based on time in the Sample Distribution section If you select TIME rather than SAMPLES in the CHANGE SETS BASED ON TIME SAMPLES display you first will be asked if you want to enter a setting for the first switch time If you respond YES you will be prompted for the time of the first bottle or set change The first time switch displays are indi cated by Display s 95 46 and 47 in Figure 18 The first switch time setting allows you to control the times of each bottle switch without delaying the routine and thereby missing samples For example if you have programmed the sampler for time switches every hour and you want the switches to occur on the hour you can set the time of the first switch at the next even hour start the sampling routine early and deposit
302. ttle set changes are based on time Sample at Start Time If you select YES the 3700 will take the first sample at the start time entered in the program sequence If you select NO the first sample is delayed until the number of flow pulses set in the program sequence has counted down to zero Display 270 Sample at Time Switch If you select YES the sampler will switch to a new bottle or set take a sample and reset the flow pulse count The next sample will occur after a full pulse countdown If you select NO no samples be taken at the switch time and the pulse countdown will not be reset The switch will occur in the middle of a pulse countdown and the first sample will be deposited in the new bottle or set when the countdown is completed Display 271 Nonuniform Time The Nonuniform Time option specifies the method by which nonuniform intervals are to be entered in the extended program sequence Display s 26 or 27 If you select clock time you will be able to enter a specific time and date for each sample event when entering settings in the program sequence If you select MINUTES you will be able to enter nonuniform intervals in minutes Nonuniform times are not available in a STORM sampling routine Display 280 Calibrate Sampler The Calibrate Sampler option adds or removes the calibration settings to the program sequence If 57 you select ENABLE the calibration
303. uction line A programmable setting for sampling retries is avail able If the suction line becomes clogged and no liq uid is detected in the line you can program the sampler to repeat a purge cycle as many as three times to clear the clogged line Pump Tubing and Suction Lines The pump tubing is Silastic medical grade silicon rubber Liq uid is transferred from the source to the pump through either 1 4 or 98 inch ID vinyl or e inch ID Teflon suction tubing You can easily replace the pump tubing and suction lines minimizing the need for cleaning The sampler automatically mon itors pump tubing wear tubing warning indica tion appears when the pump revolution count exceeds a user specified wear limit Strainers Isco offers two stainless steel strainers Figure 1 for priority pollutant applications a larger unit for normal flow and a smaller unit for low flow situations An all plastic strainer is avail able for sampling from highly acidic flow streams For general purpose applications Isco recommends a weighted polypropylene strainer Figure 2 Figure 1 Stainless Steel Strainer 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 2 Polypropylene Strainer Bottle Configurations With the 3700 Standard a number of sample con tainers are available for both sequential sampling and composite conversions 24 Bottle Configurations 350 ml glass with Teflon lined caps e 1000 ml polypropylene bottles with
304. umber Compositing multiple samples continues up to the programmed number of samples After the last sam ple is deposited in the bottle the sampler pauses until another sample event occurs the distributor then rotates to the new bottle position and multiple samples are deposited into the new bottle Figure 10 illustrates samples per bottle multiplexing Bottles Per Sample Multiplexing In bottles per sample multiplexing you fill a programmed number of bottles at each sample event The pro grammed number of bottles is a bottle set as many as 24 bottles can be used Bottles per sample mul tiplexing is useful when you need a sample that exceeds the capacity of your bottles It is also use ful when you need sets of identical samples for example when using more than one preservative When you use bottles per sample multiplexing you modify the normal sampling cycle relocate distributor pre sample purge sample delivery 22 post sample purge by delaying the complete post sample purge until sample volumes have been delivered to each bottle of the set Instead the pump reverses until the pump tubing is purged just beyond the liquid detector When the purged liquid passes the detector the distributor moves to the next bottle and the pump begins pumping for ward to deliver the next sample This repeats until each bottle of the set is filled A full post sample purge is completed at the end of the sample event The sampler th
305. umber of Samples With Stops and Resumes When using stops and resumes determining the number of samples you want deposited in the container requires a little planning With a time paced routine the 3700 will always take a sample automatically at the start time It will not take a sample at the stop time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Stop Time display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes configure option even if the stop time falls at a scheduled sample event time No sample will be taken at the resume time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Resume dis play of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option When you are using Stops and Resumes with flow paced routines the 3700 will not take a sample at the start time unless you have configured the sam pler to do so in the Flow Mode Sampling configure option With flow paced routines no sample will be taken at the stop time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Stop Time display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option The 3700 will not take a sample at the resume time unless you have selected ENABLE in the Sample at Resume display of the Sampling Stops and Resumes option Start Times This section discusses the sampler s start times It begins by outlining the sequence of events preced ing the start time for most sampling routines After programming you must start the sampling by pressing the start sampling key Dependi
306. umber sig nal the flow meter will not report a bottle number at the event mark Master Slave Cycle When installing the master slave pair you must press the START SAMPLING key on both machines to place both machines in the run state The first machine started becomes the master After the master completes its routine you can service it and start it again After servicing if you don t start the sampler again the master slave cycle will halt after the second sampler finishes its routine The sampler cannot reverse roles unless both are in the run state Continuous Master Slave Sampling vs Storm Monitoring with Master Slave Pairs You can use master slave sampling in applications where you want to sample continuously or for storm water runoff monitoring In continuous sampling applications service each sampler when it termi nates its routine After servicing press the START SAMPLING key to start the sampler again and resume the master slave cycle The samplers can cycle continuously because each has the same role and usually identical sampling routines If you use a master slave pair with a flow meter the flow meter usually provides pacing controls rather than sampler enable controls However storm water runoff monitoring is a non continuous event driven application requiring a different servicing cycle In many storm monitor ing applications the master slave pair and a flow meter make up a monitoring system activ
307. umidity Indicator Tee SAEPE e 121 1 KEYS 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Chapter 7 Introduction This chapter presents servicing information for the 3700 Portable Samplers in the following sections Servicing the controller Control box removal Removal of the distributor and pump gear cases General care of CMOS circuitry Circuit description of the electronic circuitry e Sample event cycle Included is an illustrated Replacement Parts List and a list of available accessories available for the 3700 Sampler For information on servicing and replacing power sources consult the Isco Power Products Guide shipped with this manual Servicing the Controller The electronic circuitry of the 3700 Sampler is solid state and its reliability is high If the unit should fail to operate properly items such as a bro ken or intermittent connection in the power cable or wiring harness should be suspected If Serious Problems Occur If you suspect an electronic problem Isco strongly recommends call ing the Isco Customer Service Department at 800 775 2965 or 402 474 2233 outside the U S A Canada and Mexico The service department will provide information on how to return the sampler or subassemblies to the factory for service For example you can remove the pump assembly dis tributor assembly or control box and return them separately for servicing Because of the complex nature of m
308. ump tube from a previous sample event Event mark An event mark is a signal that the sampler sends to a flow meter or other device a each sample event Each time the flow meter receives an event mark pulse the flow meter places a mark on the its recording chart Marking the recording chart cross references the charted flow with the sample events Multiplexing There are two types of multiplex ing samples per bottle and bottles per sample In samples per bottle multiplexing a bottle receives samples from more than one sample event In bot tles per sample multiplexing equal sample vol umes are placed in more than one bottle at each sample event Post purge See post sample purge Pre purge See pre sample purge 162 Post sample purge Post sample purge refers to the suction line purge that follows the delivery of the sample volume s It is also called post purge i Pre sample purge Pre sample purge refers to the suction line purge that precedes the delivery of the sample volume s It is also called pre purge Real time clock A real time clock can be set to the actual time and date Sample event A sample event consists of the complete sampling cycle resulting in the collection and distribution of one or more equal sample vol umes A sample event includes pre sample and post sample purges line rinses liquid detection retries and deliveries of sample volumes No more than one sample volume is placed in any
309. upply A CAUTION If you use a 120 or 240 volt AC connected Power Pack the AC line cord is the Disconnect Device Al ways install the sampler with the line cord and plug visible and readily accessible so that power can be disconnected easily For complete information on power options and their maintenance consult the Isco Power Products Guide which was also shipped with your sampler You can order additional copies of the Power Prod ucts Guide by contacting Isco s Customer Service Department at 800 228 4373 in the U S A Interfacing Equipment A CAUTION Most Isco accessories and interfacing equipment are not certified for use in Hazardous Locations as de fined by the National Electrical Code The Model 2150 is currently undergoing Intrinsically Safe certifica tion Contact your Isco representative for its status Never operate equipment in hazardous locations that has not been certified as safe for such use A full line of accessories and interfacing equipment is available to help you adapt the sampler to your specific application some of the more common items are briefly discussed below Other accesso ries are noted throughout this manual where appropriate You will find a full list of accessories at the end of Chapter 7 in the Accessories List Isco Flow Meters and Flow Loggers The 3700 Series will accept flow pulses from all Isco flow meters for flow proportional sampling Isco flow meters and flow loggers ar
310. urrent time or flow pulse count and remaining time or pulse count to the next sample These messages vary according to the sampling routine As the routine progresses the sampler creates a log of sampling results that records pertinent information about each sample event The results include the time and date of each sample the num ber of pump counts occurring until liquid is detected for each sample event and any problems encountered You can retrieve results with the Dis play Status procedure discussed in an upcoming section in this chapter You can retrieve the results in the middle of a rou tine or when the routine is done The results remain in the sampler s memory until you start the sampler again See the section Run State for more information Interactive State The interactive state lets you program the sampler The interactive state con tains two branches the program sequence and the configure sequence Figure 14 diagrams the structure of the interactive state The program sequence defines the sampling routine it allows you to enter the interval between samples the number of samples in each bottle the sample size and the start time The configure sequence pro vides a number of setup options Some configure options provide equipment specifications bottle sizes suction line diameters and lengths and so on For example the 3700 Standard can use differ ent sized sequential bottles 350 ml and 1000 ml You must e
311. us even with the sophistica tion of the sample volume measuring functions of the 3700 the volume of sample deposited in the sample bottle may vary from the programmed value The repeatability of a sample volume from sample to sample which normally is the most important consideration is typically within the 10 ml specification Replacement Parts List In Appendix A you will find a list of common replacement parts for use with the 3700 Compact or Standard Sampler When you order a replace ment part be sure to include the Isco assembly or part number a complete description of the part and the serial number of the sampler on which the part will be used Accessory Parts List Appendix B contains a list of options and acces sory parts described throughout this manual When you order an option or accessory be sure to include the part description and the Isco part number 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 133 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix A Replacement Parts Listing Ha 60 3703 26 REV C 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 50 HOLD DOWN 26 USE WITH ITEM 29 OR 27 amp 33 USE WITH ITEM 28 28 OR 29 50 RACK 60 3703 26 REV C 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler DRAWING NO 60 3703 261 REVISION C PAGE 3 of 4 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST EFFECTIVE DATE 01283 ITEM PART NUMBE
312. ve entries Changed individual entries as discussed above Pressing the right arrow or enter program key on the last entry will store the values and advance the display HH MM 12 33 DD MM YY 14 06 91 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Military Times You must enter times in military format To set the sampler s clock to 3 30 PM enter a time of 15 30 When the display above first appears the first two digits 12 will blink To enter a new time type in the new hour 15 Store the hour entry and advance to minutes by pressing the enter program key If you do not need to change the month or year entry accept the entry by pressing the right arrow or enter program key Use the left arrow key to return to a previous posi tion Press the right arrow or enter program key on the last entry 91 to store the value and advance to the next display European Date Format The sampler uses the European date format where the day precedes the month s three letter abbreviation To enter a date enter the day before the month s number and the year The sampler converts the numeric entry to the three letter abbreviation for you Exit Program Key The user can exit an input display by pressing the exit program key If you use the exit program key it will not alter the currently stored setting Programming Examples The following exam ples demonstrate the steps used to check the con figure option
313. w isco com Return equipment to 4700 Superior Street Lincoln NE 68504 1398 Other correspondence P O Box 82531 Lincoln NE 68501 2531 Disclaimers Although Isco Inc has made many references to using the sampler outdoors in this manual UL Underwriters Laboratories has certified these sam plers for indoor use only Although Isco Inc has many options for powering the Model 3700 Samplers UL Underwriters Laboratories has certified those samplers for use with the Isco made 120 VAC High Capacity Power Pack Model 913 only 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Warnings and Cautions Warnungen und Vorsichtshinweise AN The exclamation point within the triangle is a warning sign alerting you to important instruc tions in the instrument s technical reference manual Das Ausrufezeichen in Dreieck ist ein Warnze ichen das Sie darauf aufmerksam macht da wichtige Anleitungen zu diesem Handbuch geh ren Symboles de s curit Advertencias y Precauciones A Ce symbole signale l existence d instructions importantes relatives au produit dans ce man uel Esta sefial le advierte sobre la importancia de las instrucciones del manual que acompa an a este producto Warning This instrument has not been certified for use in hazardous locations as defined by the National Electrical Code 9 Pinch Point Poi
314. w pulse Using the first example above the flow increment between samples was calculated as 52 000 gallons assume that each flow pulse represents 10 000 gal lons of flow The number of flow pulses to be pro grammed into the sampler is calculated 52 000 gal 10 000 gal flow pulse 5 2 flow pulses Rounding this to an even number results in 5 flow pulses to be programmed into the sampler This in turn results in a flow increment between samples of 50 000 gallons 5 flow pulses x 10 000 gallons flow pulse Total Number Of Samples To calculate the total number of samples to be collected three quantities must be known the average flow rate the flow increment between samples calculated above and the total time over which the composite sample is to be collected The total number of samples to be col lected is determined by first calculating the total flow volume over the sampling period and then dividing this by the flow increment between sam ples For example assume that the average flow is 2 5 MGD the flow increment between samples is 50 000 gallons and the composite sample is to be collected over a 24 hour period The total flow vol ume over a 24 hour period is 2 5 MGD 2 500 000 gal day 2 500 000 gal day x 1 day 2 500 000 gal The total number of samples to be collected in this 24 hour period is then calculated 2 500 000 gal 50 000 gal samples 50 samples Thus based on an average flow of 2 5 MGD 50 samples w
315. without loading a program LOAD PROGRAM Display 255 1 2 3 NONE Save Current Program configure option Select the number with which you want to use to identify the current program when saved Select NONE to exit the display without saving a program SAVE PROGRAM AS Display 260 1 2 3 NONE Flow Mode Sampling configure option This setting affects flow paced sampling routines Select YES to take the first sample at the start time NO to take the first sample at the end of the first flow pulse interval TAKE SAMPLE AT START Display 270 TIME YES NO Flow Mode Sampling configure option This setting affects flow paced time switched sampling routines only Select YES to take a sample at switch times Select NO if you do not want a sample event at the switch times TAKE SAMPLE AT TIME Display 271 SWITCH YES NO Nonuniform Time configure option Select CLOCK TIME to enter the nonuniform time intervals as clock times Display 26 Select MINUTES to set the nonuniform intervals in minutes Display 27 ENTER INTERVALS IN Display 280 CLOCK TIME MINUTES Calibrate Sampler configure option Select ENABLE to add calibration displays to the program sequence Select DISABLE to omit the calibration displays ENABLE DISABLE Display 290 CALIBRATE SAMPLE Sampling Stop Resume configure o
316. y 8 From standby start the routine by pressing the start sampling key This places the sampler into the run state If you to start the routine after the programmed start time the sampler will allow you to reprogram the start time Before programming the sampler Especially if you are unfamiliar with the settings used in the previous routine or if the settings have been changed verify the configure option settings You must change the settings if they do not match your bottle size or the suction line used with your unit Entries suggested in this example configure the sampler for 24 1000 ml bottles and a 10 foot length of 9fs Cinch vinyl suction line enable the liquid detector and select the basic programming mode Procedures for reinitialization of the program set tings and configure options to factory settings are Use the run state displays to monitor the sam placeas steps as throne hem Example L pler s progress Example 1 Checking the configure option settings If the sampler is not already on press the ON OFF key to turn it on The standby display shown here will appear Press the ENTER PROGRAM key to access the interactive state The next display you ll see is shown in Step 2 STANDBY Step 1 10 34 50 19 JUN 91 Access the configure sequence by selecting CONFIGURE Select CONFIGURE by pressing the RIGHT ARROW key once When CONFIGURE blinks accept the selection by pressing
317. y and sys tem power Three devices allow the microprocessor to commu nicate with the outside world the 2 line 20 char acters per line LCD IC U9 and IC U18 The LCD facilitates communication with the user and is con nected through U13 transistor Q2 ther mistor R15 and other components provide the LCD with a temperature compensated driver volt age By providing temperature compensation the display quality is optimized over a wide tempera ture range IC U9 and IC U18 are I O devices which allow the microprocessor to read the keypad sound the beeper advance the distributor measure pump counts and so on 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler A 24 position keypad connected at P5 directs the microprocessor through the program Many dis crete components along with IC U11 are used to decode pressed keys All user originated instruc tions enter the system through the keypad The 3700 Sampler is supplied with a liquid detec tion system that gives it the ability to accurately deliver specified sample volumes The liquid detec tion system consists of a piezoelectric sensor and filtering circuitry The sensor mounted on the exte rior of the control box produces a signal propor tional to an induced strain on the pump tubing This signal is routed through P8 to IC U15 and its associated circuitry where it is massaged into a YES or NO indication of liquid presence IC U15 the main circuit component of the detect
318. y cause the sample to miss the bottle opening 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Figure 6 Placement of the Sampler Adjacent to Manhole M Note Although the suction line can extend to a liquid source as many as 99 feet from the sampler note that the maximum lift for the peristaltic pump with either the Teflon or vinyl line is 26 feet When installing the sampler be sure the head the verti cal distance between the level of the liquid source and the pump is no greater than 26 feet The pump will not be able to deliver samples for heads of 26 feet or greater If it is necessary to enter the manhole to position the strainer and suction line observe standard safety precautions Refer to Chapter 3 for a dis cussion of safety considerations Connection to a Flow Meter or Flow Logger Chapter 5 discusses connecting the sampler to Isco and non Isco flow meters If there is not a con nect cable attached to the flow meter connector on the side of the sampler be sure that the protective cover is tightly screwed in place to maintain the water tightness of the unit Placing the Sampler into Operation Refer to Figure 6 Placement of the Sampler Adja cent to Manhole for placement of the sampler You can program the sampler for automatic opera tion as described in Chapter 4 Because the lith ium battery maintains the program settings you can easily program the sampler even when it is turned off in the office or the
319. ze reset the controller the entire RAM with the exception of the configure option settings for current pump count total number of bottles bottle size suction line length and sampler ID will be reset to factory settings Select NO the leave the settings unchanged RE INITIALIZE Display 371 YES NO 159 3700 Standard and 3700 Compact Sampler Appendix D Calculating Flow Increment Between Samples The 3700 Sampler will accept flow proportional inputs from an external flow meter or flow logger These electronic flow input signals are transmitted to the sampler at fixed increments of total flow for example every 10 000 gallons Each time 10 000 gallons of liquid flows past the flow meter it sends a signal to the sampler which registers it as a sin gle flow pulse You can program the sampler to totalize any number of flow pulses from 1 to 9 999 before initiating a sampling event For example if the sampler were programmed to totalize 5 flow pulses and each flow pulse represented 10 000 gal lons of total flow a sample would be collected each time 50 000 gallons 5 flow pulses of 10 000 gallons each had passed the flow meter Time Interval Known If the desired average time interval between individual samples is known the flow increment between samples can be determined by calculating how much flow based on the average flow rate occurs during that time interval For example assume that the av

Manual - Equipco

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents